User Guide

Your Palm Treo 750 Smartphone
™ ®

Intellectual property notices
© 2006 Palm Inc. All rights reserved. Palm, Treo, and the Palm and Treo logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm Inc. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners. The Treo trademark is used by Palm Inc. in Sweden and Denmark with the express consent of Pfizer and its affiliated companies. The products marketed and/or sold by Palm Inc. under the Treo trademark are in no way affiliated with Pfizer or its business. This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents: 7 ,007 ,239; 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957 ,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947 ,975; 6,947 ,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907 ,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780; 6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699; 6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047; 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697 ,639; 6,687 ,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044; 6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148;6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202; 6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457 ,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824; 6,437 ,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317 ,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423; 6,147 ,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending. This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Palm, Inc. is an authorized licensee of the MultiMediaCard trademark. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. All rights reserved.

may arise through the use of this software. Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.

End user notice
Microsoft® Voice Command Version 1.5 for Windows Mobile® NOTE The Voice Command application is not available in all languages. See Setting up voice commands . IMPORTANT Do not become distracted from driving safely if operating a motor vehicle while using Device Software. Operating certain parts of this Device requires user attention. Diverting attention away from the road while driving can possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences. Even occasional, short diversions of attention can be dangerous if your attention is diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Do not change system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel. Microsoft makes no representations, warranties, or other determinations that ANY use of the Software Product is legal, safe, or in any manner recommended or intended while driving or otherwise operating a motor vehicle.

General Operation
Voice Command Control: Many of the functions of the Device Software can be accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while driving allows you to initiate the command with a button and then operate the Device mostly without removing your hands from the wheel. Prolonged Views of Screen: If you are driving, do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to

Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that

the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. Let Your Judgment Prevail: The Device Software is only an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local

conditions and existing traffic regulations. The Device Software is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor the speech recognition functions and address any errors. PN: 406-10964-01 v 1.0

Contents
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting up synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Chapter 2: Moving around on your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Opening and closing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using your Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Making calls from the Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Other ways of making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 What can I do during a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Defining speed-dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

CONTENTS

v

Chapter 4: Synchronizing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Synchronization overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 How do I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 What can I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Synchronizing using the sync cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Setting up wireless synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Other ways to synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Setting synchronization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Chapter 5: Your email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Setting up email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Sending and receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Working with email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Sending email messages from within another application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Chapter 6: Your text and multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Using the Messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Customizing the Messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Using Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Chapter 7: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Browsing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Using your device as a wireless modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Chapter 8: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Windows Media Player Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

vi

CONTENTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Today screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 9: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Sharing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 CONTENTS vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . 176 Chapter 11: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . 214 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Using expansion cards . . . . . . . 201 Chapter 12: Your personal settings . . . . 189 Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Chapter 10: Your Microsoft Office tools . . . . . . . . 167 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . 269 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 13: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Reinstalling the desktop software . . . . 255 Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Terms . . . . . 248 Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Transferring info from another device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 viii CONTENTS . . . 235 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Making room on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

An advanced wireless smartphone A Windows Mobile organizer with portable expansion capability (miniSD) ® TIP LOOK HERE: Don’t miss the helpful tips and cross-references given in these boxes.Welcome Congratulations on the purchase of your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone. you need not only a service contract • • • NOTE In some smartphone packages. Data speeds vary based on network availability and capacity. you now have all of the following: • • but also high-speed data service from your wireless service provider. In one compact and indispensable device. the screen protector may already be applied to WHAT’S IN THE BOX? 1 . If you also want to browse the web and send and receive email.3-megapixel digital camera Support for numerous mobile email solutions Text and multimedia messaging Windows Media Player Mobile ® What’s in the box? You should have received all of the following items in the smartphone box: Hardware • • • • • • • • Microsoft Office Mobile suite ® Treo 750 smartphone Rechargeable battery (1200 mAh) AC charger (with international adapters in some smartphone packages) USB sync cable Stereo headset Screen protector This guide will help you set up your smartphone and quickly learn to use it. You may also need high-speed data service to send and receive multimedia messages. you need a service contract with your wireless service provider. • High-speed data with GPRS/EDGE and UMTS/HSDPA support A 1. NOTE If you want to use your phone and send and receive text messages.

Documentation and software • • • Read This First setup poster Treo 750 Smartphone Quick Reference Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. you need all the items that came in the smartphone box (see What’s in the box?). as well as the following: • TIP Visit www. You must also have your smartphone within range of your wireless service provider’s cellular coverage. ActiveSync desktop synchronization software ® • • • Windows Media Player 10 ® Additional software for your smartphone User Guide (this guide) • • • • Palm warranty End User License Agreement 2 WHAT DO I NEED TO GET STARTED? .com to purchase a replacement screen protector if the original one becomes scratched or worn. which includes the following: • You must have an activated wireless account (using a SIM card from your wireless service provider) with data services. you need access to that computer during setup. If you plan to synchronize personal information between your smartphone and a computer. Your package may also contain an extra screen protector.your smartphone screen.palm. What do I need to get started? As you work through the instructions in this guide.

follow these few easy steps to set up your smartphone and get it running. you’ll want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. too. Benefits • Know where your smartphone controls are located • Start using your smartphone right away . As you become more familiar with your smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have fun.CHAP TE R 1 Setting up Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone. But first.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview. . . . . . . . . 7 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Making your first call . . 5 Inserting the SIM card and battery. . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting up synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SETTING UP 1 CHAPTER Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview Front view Earpiece Indicator light (phone and charge indicator) 5-way navigator with Center button Right action key OK Power/End Volume Side button Left action key Phone/Send Start Microphone Multi-connector Headset jack PALM TREO 750 SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW 5 .

You can change the function of the Side button (see Reassigning buttons). Do not store it in a place where other items might damage it. Back view Self-portrait mirror Camera lens Speaker Infrared (IR) port Expansion card slot Reset button (located inside expansion card slot door) Battery door release 6 PALM TREO 750 SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW . pressing the Side button opens the Windows Media® Player Mobile application (see Windows Media Player Mobile). By default. DID YOU KNOW? IMPORTANT The smartphone speaker includes a large magnet. so be sure not to store your smartphone near credit cards or other items that could be demagnetized.1 CHAPTER SETTING UP TIP Be careful not to scratch or crush your smartphone screen.

INSERTING THE SIM CARD AND BATTERY 7 . your wireless service provider will provide you with one. you need to insert a SIM card. To use your smartphone’s phone. you don’t need to hunt for “off” or “mute” settings in individual applications.SETTING UP 1 CHAPTER Top view Stylus Ringer switch The Ringer switch silences all sounds. email. DID YOU KNOW? features. TIP Inserting the SIM card and battery Your SIM card contains account information such as your phone number and voicemail access number. or web If you don’t have a SIM card. contact your wireless service provider. including music. If a SIM card is not included in your smartphone box. at once.

Battery contacts Phone contacts 5 Slide the battery door back into place. Battery door release Notch 4 Align the metal contacts on the battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment. 2 If the battery is installed. Align the notches to make sure you have the card oriented correctly. and then press it into place. insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle. slide the SIM card into the cutout in the lower-right corner of the compartment until you feel it snap into place. Your smartphone screen turns on. and use your other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone.1 CHAPTER SETTING UP 1 Use one hand to press the Battery door release. 3 With the metal contacts facing the battery compartment. ® 8 INSERTING THE SIM CARD AND BATTERY . Slide your finger under the left side of the battery (nearest the stylus) and lift up to remove. Wait for the progress bar to fill and the Windows Mobile screen to appear. remove it.

If you connect your smartphone to a power source without the battery inserted.com. prepare the AC charger by inserting the adapter that fits the wall outlet you’re going to use. You can buy an extra battery as a spare for long airplane trips or periods of heavy data use.palm. 2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.SETTING UP 1 CHAPTER If your smartphone does not turn on after you insert the battery. you need high-speed data service from your wireless service provider in addition to your service contract. 7 If your SIM card is not already activated. or contact your wireless service provider directly for assistance. connect the charger cable to the bottom of your smartphone. If you plan to use email and web browsing. you need to connect it to the AC charger to charge it (see Charging the battery). You may also need high-speed data service to send and receive multimedia messages. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure the 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation. follow the activation steps provided by your wireless service provider. TIP Charging the battery Although the battery may come with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process. 1 If international adapters are included in your smartphone package. nothing happens. To ensure proper functioning. Visit www. See Maximizing battery life for tips on making your battery’s power last longer. TIP battery is inserted before you charge. If it still doesn’t start. 3 With the arrow on the connector facing up (toward your smartphone screen). we recommend that after setup you charge your smartphone for three hours (or until the indicator light is solid green) to give it a full charge. perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). be sure to use batteries from Palm only. CHARGING THE BATTERY 9 .

Battery icon • DID YOU KNOW? If the battery is low. the indicator light flashes red.1 CHAPTER SETTING UP the onscreen battery icon displays the charging status: A solid lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging. Solid green indicates that your smartphone is fully charged. A shaded lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged. A partial battery without a lightning bolt indicates that the battery is not connected to a wall outlet and that it has some power. 10 CHARGING THE BATTERY . • Indicator light An exclamation point (!) indicates that the battery needs to be charged immediately. When your smartphone is on (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). Solid red indicates that your smartphone is being charged. 4 Check the indicator light to confirm that your smartphone is being charged.

tap the phone-off icon. The battery in your smartphone has a much longer useful life if you charge it frequently instead of waiting until it’s fully drained. media players (including listening to music with wireless headphones using the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology). turn off your wireless services (see Turning wireless services on/off). The wireless features (phone. email. set the synchronization interval to a maximum of every 15 minutes during peak times and every hour (or turned off completely) during non-peak times (see Setting the synchronization schedule).SETTING UP 1 CHAPTER If your battery ever becomes fully drained. If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your smartphone for a while. You can maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines: • power than the organizer features. • • If you are synchronizing email and other information directly with your corporate Exchange Server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. You can forward calls to a different number or let all calls be picked up by voicemail (see Forwarding calls). Recharge the battery to access your info. games. or other applications. messaging. DID YOU KNOW? Maximizing battery life Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? Charge your smartphone whenever you’re at your desk. and web) on your smartphone generally consume more You can also see if your wireless services are on by pressing Menu (right action key) and selecting Wireless Manager. or charge it overnight each day. and then select Wireless Manager. keep an eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary. To see if your wireless services are on. Turn off the Bluetooth feature when you do not need to make a Bluetooth • • CHARGING THE BATTERY 11 . your info remains safely stored on your smartphone. If you spend a lot of time using the camera.

1 CHAPTER SETTING UP connection (see Entering basic Bluetooth settings). Turn down the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness). Temperatures over 50 degrees Celsius (120 degrees Fahrenheit) can permanently reduce the capacity and life span of any lithium-ion battery. 3 Use the number pad on the keyboard to enter the number you want to call. pressing Power/End hangs up the call. 12 MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL . your smartphone searches for a signal. • 2 If prompted. unless you are on a call. press Center to turn off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info). temporarily turn off your phone (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). If you’re on a call. Keep your battery away from direct sunlight and other sources of heat. 1 Press Phone/Send Today screen. • Making your first call Turn the voice command feature off (see Setting up voice commands). which consumes power. if you are in an area with no wireless coverage. As with any mobile phone. to display your • • • • TIP You can also press Power/End to display your Today screen. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage. Set your screen to turn off automatically after a shorter period of inactivity (see Optimizing power settings). Turn off the option to receive beamed information (see Beaming an entry or file).

Continue entering numbers to place the call. For more info on the Dial Lookup list. look for your phone number below the title bar. (right action key). see Dialing by contact name. Volume button 5 When your call is complete.SETTING UP 1 CHAPTER The Dial Lookup list might appear while you are dialing a number. press Power/End to end the call. TIP 4 Press Phone/Send to dial. 3 Press Menu Adjusting call volume While a call is in progress. MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL 13 . press Phone/Send . 5 On the Phone tab. 2 If you do not see your Today screen. 4 Select Preferences > Phone Settings. What’s my number? 1 Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume.

your info is then automatically updated in both places— there is no need to enter the info twice (see Synchronizing information). 14 SETTING UP SYNCHRONIZATION . your network has not yet sent the number to the SIM card (this does not affect SIM card functionality). If your phone number still does not appear.1 CHAPTER SETTING UP Look here for your phone number Setting up synchronization After you’ve finished setting up your smartphone. If your phone number doesn’t appear on the Phone Settings screen. Turn your phone off. Synchronization allows you to enter or change information on your smartphone or in Microsoft Office Outlook on your computer. wait a few hours. and then turn on your phone and repeat these steps. please contact your wireless service provider for assistance. ® 6 Press OK TIP . we recommend that you set up a synchronization method to get the most out of your smartphone.

Benefits • Quickly move around and complete tasks in applications using one thumb on the 5-way navigator • • Access extra features with menus Find and open applications quickly . you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map. Most applications that work on your smartphone use the same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these controls.CHAP TE R 2 Moving around on your Palm Treo 750 smartphone ™ ® Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out the streets? Learning to move around on your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone is similar.

. . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Opening and closing applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using your Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Navigating around the screen . . . . . 17 Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TIP to highlight and Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator. and you must use the stylus instead. Press Center select items. The arrow icons that indicate directions on the 5-way are different from the onscreen scroll arrows and the arrows that indicate that a list is available (see Selecting options in a list). Up . Left . or Down to move around the screen. press Right . Using the 5-way. you’ll find your own favorite way to scroll.MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER Navigating around the screen To navigate around the smartphone screen. you can use the 5-way navigator or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. As you become familiar with your smartphone. TIP Center Up Left Right Down NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 17 . DID YOU KNOW? Custom navigation features are available when you browse the web using Internet Explorer (see Viewing a web page). and select items. highlight.

or action in that direction. press Down to scroll to the tabs. such as when adding a contact. There are several methods of scrolling: • TIP When you are using applications such as Inbox. on your smartphone you scroll to move from field to field or page to page. When inside a list. or Down to move to the next field. • • • Press and hold Option while pressing Left or Right to jump to the top or bottom of the current document or entry. press Right or Left to move to the next character. Up . When inside a text field. Left . and Word Mobile. TIP • • When viewing a screen with tabs. and press Up or Down to move between lines.2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE Scrolling through screens As on a computer. Can’t find the Option key? See Using the keyboard. Press and hold Option while pressing Up or Down to scroll one screen at a time. button. and then press Left or Right to move between tabs. press and hold Option while pressing Left or Right on the 5-way to automatically go to the top and bottom of a screen. Press Right . press and hold Up or Down to rapidly scroll through the list. Internet Explorer Mobile. Press the 5-way on the front of your smartphone. These keys work just like the Page Up and Page Down keys on your computer keyboard. or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list. 18 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN .

Closing screens To accept the information you entered on a screen and to return to the previous screen—or to return to the previous screen without making any changes—do one of the following: • • The highlight can take one of two forms. The best way to learn to use the 5-way is to experiment. Press OK . Highlighting and selecting items On most screens. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. a list entry. These NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 19 . one item—a button. and as you do. TIP Scroll bar with slider Scroll arrows • Tap and drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar. Press the 5-way buttons. Use the stylus to tap or in the upper-right corner of the screen.MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER • Tap an onscreen scroll arrow. an option. or a web link. follow the movement of the border around the screen. Dismiss. Scroll arrows buttons are not accessible using the 5-way. or Hide). a check box. or a check box—is highlighted by default. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to another before opening or selecting it. The behavior of the 5-way varies slightly in each application. depending on what is highlighted: • Border: This rectangular border highlights items such as an onscreen button (such as OK.

When text is highlighted. and the left action key activates a specific command. these keys may do nothing at all. After highlighting an item with the 5-way. Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight. TIP vary from application to application and from screen to screen. Remember that action key functions vary from screen to screen. triple-tap it. or an item in a list. To highlight a word. text. so be sure to check the onscreen label before pressing the action keys. Using the action keys The left and right action keys give you quick access to tasks that you can do on the current screen.2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE • Reverse type (light text on a dark background): This highlights items such as a phone number. To highlight a paragraph. Highlighting text You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen. Look on the screen directly above the action key to see the action that it takes in the current context. so the action key items 20 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN . you can press Backspace to delete the highlighted text. double-tap it. In some contexts. In most cases the right action key opens the menu. you can select or activate it by pressing Center or by tapping the item with the stylus. such as New or Edit. an email address.

a menu provides access to additional features.MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER Left action key activates this command Left action key Right action key activates this command Right action key Selecting menu items In many applications. 2 Press Up or Down menu item. 1 Press Menu (right action key) to display an application’s menu. it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the menu in various applications. To get the most out of your smartphone. to highlight a NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 21 . The menu is hidden until you press Menu (right action key).

press Left .2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 3 If an arrow appears next to a menu item. Selecting options in a shortcut menu Most applications also provide access to context-sensitive shortcut menus—similar to the right-click menus on a computer. You can identify whether a list is available when you select the field. 1 Highlight the item whose shortcut menu you want to see. 4 Press Center to select the menu item. Selecting options in a list Lists enable you to select from a range of options. and then press Up or Down to highlight a menu item. a list is 22 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN . or press Left or Menu (right action key) to close the menu and cancel your selection. press Menu (right action key) followed by the underlined letter in the menu item’s name. If a rectangle appears around the field along with a downward-pointing arrow. 3 Press Up or Down menu item. 2 Press and hold Center shortcut menu. to open the TIP You can also tap and hold the stylus on an item to open the shortcut menu. press Center or Right to display additional options for that item. or press Left to cancel your selection. To return to the main menu without making a selection. to highlight a 4 Press Center to select the menu item. DID YOU KNOW? You can select most menu items by pressing a key on the keyboard. To quickly access a menu item. The shortcut menu options vary based on the highlighted selection.

MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER available. and then tap the item in the list. and then press Center to display the items in the list. Use your stylus to tap the arrow. do any of the following: • Use the 5-way to highlight the field. Lists are different from the menus described earlier in this section. NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 23 . TIP When selecting fields you might not see the downward-pointing arrow until you press Center on the 5-way. Press Up or Down to highlight the item you want. To select from a list. and then press Center to make your selection. you must tap the arrow with the stylus to display the list. press Left . • To exit the list and cancel your selection. DID YOU KNOW? • In fields where you see a downward-pointing arrow but no rectangle.

and other characters in applications that support this feature. The backlight turns off automatically when the screen turns off or when you are on a call or playing music in the background for longer than the time specified in Backlight Settings. After opening the keyboard. you can set various input options by tapping the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon. numbers. Your smartphone includes a keyboard backlight for low light conditions. Tap the keyboard icon in the center at the bottom of any screen where it appears.2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE Using the keyboard Left action key Phone/Send Start Right action key Power/End OK Backspace Option Shift/Search Space Alt Understanding the keyboard backlight DID YOU KNOW? Return Shift You can also use the onscreen keyboard to enter letters. The keyboard backlight activates automatically when the screen turns on. You can set different time intervals depending on whether the smartphone is operating on battery power 24 USING THE KEYBOARD .

When Caps Lock is on. When Option Lock is on. and then press the key of the desired character. press Option again. Select the System tab. and then enter a letter. Press Option twice to turn on Option Lock. punctuation. TIP You can change the backlight shut-off interval. TIP You can turn off the first-letter capitalization setting (see Setting input options). this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen: . Entering numbers. punctuation. You don’t need to press and hold Shift while entering a letter. the first letter of each sentence or field is capitalized and the remaining text you enter is lowercase. Set the time interval on the Battery Power tab and on the External Power tab. • USING THE KEYBOARD 25 . and then enter a series of letters. You don’t need to hold Option while pressing the key. To enter these characters. To turn off Caps Lock. press Shift ( or ) again. this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen: . and then press the desired keys to enter a series of characters. To turn off Option Lock. The backlight also turns off when an application’s power-saving features turn it off. and then select Backlight. and symbols Numbers. do one of the following: • Entering lowercase and uppercase letters By default. Press Start and select Settings. and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. • Press Shift ( or ). Press Shift ( or ) twice to turn on Caps Lock.MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER or is connected to an external power source. To enter other uppercase letters. do one of the following: • Press Option .

press e. the alternate character available for the R key is ®. press Backspace to return to the full list of alternate characters. 2 Narrow the list by pressing the key that corresponds to the character you want. 3 Press Up or Down desired character. TIP 1 Press Alt to display the alternate character list. You can then press another key.2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE Entering other symbols and accented characters You can enter symbols and accented characters that don't appear on the keys by using the alternate characters list. to highlight the The alternate characters are grouped according to their similarity to the corresponding key. to enter an é. For example. See the table below for a list of corresponding characters. to insert the 26 USING THE KEYBOARD . If you press the wrong key. For example. 4 Press Center character. and for the T key is ™.

MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER 0 Symbols and accented characters Press Alt and enter… a A b or B c C e E f or F i I l or L Press Alt to select… Press Alt and enter… n N o O p or P r or R s S t or T u U to select… Press Alt and enter… x or X y Y 0 1 2 3 ! $ to select… áàäâãåæ ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ ß ç¢© Ç¢© éèëê ÉÈËÊ ƒ íìïî ÍÌÏÎ £ ñ Ñ óòöôœõ ÓÒÖÔŒÕ ¶ ® ßš ߊ ™ úùüû ÚÙÜÛ x¤ ýÿ ÝŸ ° 1 ¼ ½ 2 3 ¾ ¡ £¥¢$ by itself to select these characters: £¥¢$[]{}<>«»©® :&_•%=÷^ ° ~\ص| USING THE KEYBOARD 27 .

press C to jump to Calculator. TIP With the Start menu open. For example. select the shortcut icons at the top of the Start menu to open recently used applications. 4 (Optional) Press OK to return to Programs and open another application. applications close automatically 28 OPENING AND CLOSING APPLICATIONS . and so on. press a letter to jump to the first app that begins with that letter. In most cases. Closing applications You can have several applications open at once. select Programs. DID YOU KNOW? You can open apps by pressing and holding Option and then pressing Phone/ Send. The current application continues to run in the background. press the letter underlined in the application’s name to open the app. Or. 1 Press Start to open the Start menu. so you don’t need to exit an application to open another one. For example. press H to open Help. To view additional applications. or OK. You can change which app a button combination opens (see Reassigning buttons). 3 Press Center to open the highlighted application. In Programs. Press C again to jump to Camera.2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE Opening and closing applications Opening applications You can access all the applications on your smartphone through the Start menu. 2 Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the application you want to use. Start.

If you’re on a call. or use the Start menu to access the Today screen. see the number of unread email messages. TIP USING YOUR TODAY SCREEN 29 . deselect the number. see your latest calendar appointments. press Phone/Send . pressing Power/End hangs up the call. If the Today screen is already displayed and you’re not on a call. your smartphone dials the number. Using your Today screen From your Today screen you can quickly look up a contact. To access your Today screen. Manually closing applications helps conserve battery power and frees up memory. do one of the following: • Select the application you want to close. but you can also close applications manually. Select Stop All to close all your open applications. TIP 1 Press and hold OK Settings. NOTE If you press OK to leave an application. If a number is highlighted. You can also open the Today screen by pressing Power/End. to open Memory 2 On the Running Programs tab. and then select Stop to close it. • If you press Phone/Send while a number is highlighted. the current application continues to run in the background. unless you are on a call.MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2 CHAPTER when available memory is low. make a call. and even perform a web search. pressing Power/End turns off the screen display.

• • Speed-dial entries: Select a speed-dial button—either a picture or text—to call the number assigned to it. See Dialing by contact name for more info. • 30 USING YOUR TODAY SCREEN .2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE Title bar and status info Dial Lookup field Speed-dial entries Web search field • Title bar and status info: See What are all those icons? to learn about the icons that appear in this area. TIP You can select a picture for your Today screen background and select which items appear in the Today screen. or begin typing a name to look up the associated number in Contacts. Dial Lookup field: Type the number you want to call and press Center to dial. See Defining speed-dial buttons to create your own. See Today screen settings for details. Web search field: Enter a web address or a keyword and press Center or Return to view a list of search results based on the address or word (data services connection required).

open applications. You can send text messages. for example. • Create speed-dial buttons with pictures of your friends . and even find out how many unread email messages you have. see your upcoming appointments. you can swap between calls. go to your favorite web pages. along with the Today screen. Benefits • • Stay in touch—you choose how Work in other applications when on an active call.CHAP TE R 3 Your phone The phone. send text messages to ignored calls. You can creatively manage multiple calls. and create conference calls. And you can do more than manage your phone calls. is your home base for making and receiving calls.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . 42 Defining speed-dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 . 33 Making calls from the Today screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 What can I do during a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Other ways of making calls . . . . . .

DID YOU KNOW? You can press and hold the Power/End button to turn your phone on and off. This means you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer features of your device without turning on the phone. press Menu (right action key). DID YOU KNOW? Turning your phone off From the Today screen. and then select Phone. the phone can be on and ready for you to receive phone calls or messages. press Menu (right action key). Turning your phone on From the Today screen. Your phone is not connected to any TURNING YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE ON/OFF 33 . The term phone refers to the wireless feature of your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone that enables you to connect to your wireless service provider’s network so that you can make and receive calls and send and receive data. the indicator light flashes amber and no bars appear in the signal-strength icon. it connects to a mobile network so that you can make and receive phone calls and use other wireless services (if supported by the local network). when the screen is turned off. The phone and the screen of your smartphone can be turned off and on separately. When you turn on your phone. select Wireless Manager.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off The term smartphone refers to the device and its physical aspects. your wireless service provider’s name appears in the upper-left of the screen and the signal-strength icon appears at the top of the screen. When your smartphone locates a signal. the signal-strength icon has bars in it. When your phone is off. the phone-off icon appears at the top of the screen and Phone Off appears in the upper-left of the screen. You can go to Wireless Manager by tapping the signal-strength icon and tapping Wireless Manager. If you’re outside a coverage area. Also. When you are inside a coverage area. and then select Phone. select Wireless Manager.

you can still use Microsoft Office apps and all the organizer features of your smartphone. You can turn your screen on and off by pressing Power/End . for example. You can also turn off the screen without turning off the wireless features on your smartphone. Dialing from the Today screen 1 Go to your Today screen. select the System tab. when you’re on a plane and want to look at your calendar. TIP Making calls from the Today screen Your smartphone offers several ways to make phone calls from the Today screen. DID YOU KNOW? When you're dialing a phone number. 3 Press Phone/Send to dial.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE mobile network. select Settings. enter a phone number in the Dial Lookup field. and then select Power. You can set how long the screen stays on. Waking up the screen and turning it off Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the organizer features of your smartphone. Select the Advanced tab. 2 Using the numbered keys on the keyboard. This makes it easy to respond to further dialing instructions. 34 MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN . you can enter * and # without first pressing Option. Although you can no longer use the phone. Press Start. Adjust the number of minutes the phone stays on when idle using the On battery power setting.

Dialing with a speed-dial button Your smartphone enables you to create both picture and text speed-dial buttons so • MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN 35 . See Defining speed-dial buttons. Press and hold the Quick Key that you assigned to the speed-dial button. and then press Center . your device dials the number. For emergencies. You can make a call using your speed-dial buttons by doing any of the following: • TIP If you press Phone/Send while a number is highlighted. See Locking your smartphone. press Option to avoid starting a contact lookup. You do not need to press Option before entering the number. TIP • Tap a speed-dial button with the stylus. that you can select a button on the Today screen to quickly dial a number. deselect the number or use the Start menu. However. you can dial your national emergency number (such as 911 or 112) without pressing Option first. If you lock your smartphone and use a PIN as the password. if you select Strong alphanumeric as the password type. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some speed-dial buttons.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER NOTE You do not need to press Option to access the numbers on the keyboard. when dialing short numbers. However. you can dial an emergency number by entering the number in the password field and pressing Send. you must first press Option twice before entering the number in the password field. the number may conflict with a contact name. You can customize the default speed-dial buttons. If this occurs. Select a speed-dial button with the 5-way navigator. If a number is highlighted and you want to access the Today screen. See Editing a speed-dial button.

begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to call: To see more speed-dial buttons. • • • Dialing by contact name You can look up contacts quickly by entering just a few letters of a contact’s name directly from your Today screen. and then a few letters of the last name (JOH SMI for John Smith) • number by contact name. you must create some contacts (see Adding a contact. entering SM finds both Smilla Anderson and John Smith.) or import them by synchronizing (see Synchronizing information). Entering SM AN finds only Smilla Anderson. TIP You can hide your speed-dial buttons on your Today Screen and still use your Quick Keys to call a speed-dial number. or tap and hold the button. To 36 MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN . press OK. a space.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE • To dial an alternate number for a contact. or Left . Down . Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). For example. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you can dial a First name (JOH for John) Last name (SMI for Smith) First initial. To clear the Dial Lookup field and start another Contacts search. Right . 2 Using the keyboard. and then last initial (J S for John Smith) A few letters of the first name. highlight the picture speed-dial area and press Right or Left repeatedly. a space. 1 Go to your Today screen. highlight the speed-dial button and press and hold Center . or highlight the text speed-dial area and press Up . and then select a number from the shortcut menu.

4 Press Phone/Send to dial. Copy a number from another application. press Backspace. or tap and hold with the stylus. TIP DID YOU KNOW? To see a contact’s address.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER delete letters when correcting a misspelled name. 3 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number. 3 Select the number you want to dial. 1 Go to your Today screen. switch to Dial Pad. 2 Press Phone/Send Dial Pad. You can paste numbers directly into the Dial Pad. DID YOU KNOW? BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on). company. and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to paste the number. and select or press After you look up a contact. MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN 37 . you can select how you want to communicate with that person. 4 Press Phone/Send Center to dial. and other details. press Up to highlight the name and press Center on the 5-way. Press and hold Center on the 5-way. and then select the communication method you want to use. Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad The onscreen Dial Pad is useful when you need to dial numbers that are expressed as letters and when you need large numbers that you can tap with your finger or the stylus.

Try them all and you’ll discover which methods you prefer. To select from a chronological list of calls: Go to your Today screen. press Phone/Send . 38 OTHER WAYS OF MAKING CALLS . and then press Phone/ Send to dial. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select View By > Company. 4 Select the number you want to dial. highlight the number or contact name you want to call. TIP You can also access the Call Log and Dial Pad from the Today screen by pressing Menu (right action key). 1 Press Start • and select Contacts. and then press and hold Phone/Send .3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Redialing a recently called number • To dial the last number you called: Go to your Today screen. To select from your most recently dialed numbers: Go to your Today screen. and then press either Call (left action key) or Phone/Send to dial. begin entering the first few letters of the company name. • Other ways of making calls Your smartphone offers several ways to make phone calls other than from the Today screen. press Phone/Send . 5 Press Phone/Send to dial. Dialing by company name BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on). Highlight the number you want to call. and then select Call Log. 3 Using the keyboard.

or multimedia). press the headset button. select Edit (right action key). TIP Press Phone/Send Press Answer . If the headset is attached. To answer a call. and then select Copy. email. do one of the following: • • • 1 Use the 5-way to highlight the phone number you want to dial in the web page or message. 2 Press Center to open the Phone dialog box. If you can’t dial a phone number directly from a web page or a message. your phone must be on. Open the Dial Pad. You can answer the phone as you normally would.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Dialing from a web page or message Your smartphone recognizes most phone numbers that appear in web pages or in messages (text. This is different from having only the screen turned on (see Turning your phone on). The audio pauses during your call. RECEIVING CALLS 39 . the smartphone rings softly. If music is playing when a call arrives. highlight the number. or press Power/End . press Menu (right action key) and select Ignore. and then select Yes to dial. Receiving calls To answer calls. To ignore a call and send it to voicemail. See a picture of the person calling you! Learn how to assign a caller ID picture in Adding a contact. Press Phone/Send to dial. and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to paste. your calls go to voicemail. (left action key). When your phone is off.

• When you silence the ringer. 2 Press and hold 1 on the keyboard or tap the Voicemail speed-dial button to dial your wireless service provider’s voicemail system. you can either answer the call or let it ring through to voicemail.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE DID YOU KNOW? You can also ignore a call and send a text message. slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off . Alt . For some wireless service providers. or you can create a new speed-dial button with the number (see Creating a speed-dial button). OK . Using voicemail Setting up voicemail 1 Go to your Today screen. If that’s the case. 3 Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail. Press Menu (right action key) and select Ignore with text message. 40 USING VOICEMAIL . To immediately silence all system sounds including the ringer. All sounds remain off until you slide the Ringer switch back to Sound On . DID YOU KNOW? To silence the ringer while your smartphone is ringing: • Press the Volume button or any key on your smartphone except Phone/Send . Start . or the 5-way. the Voicemail speed-dial button may not be assigned to a number. Power/End . you can edit the Voicemail speed-dial button to add the number to your service provider’s voicemail system (see Editing a speed-dial button).

YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Retrieving voicemail messages from the Today screen DID YOU KNOW? When a Voicemail icon appears at the top of the screen. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. You can display onscreen voicemail playback controls. you can tap this icon to retrieve your voicemail. USING VOICEMAIL 41 . a Voicemail icon appears at the top of your screen. voicemail notification. You can retrieve voicemail messages when you receive a notification. 3 Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard. or press Extra Digits (left action key) if you defined this option (see Creating a speed-dial button for details). see Creating a speed-dial button. 2 Press 1 on the keyboard to dial your wireless service provider’s voicemail system. TIP Retrieving messages from a voicemail notification NOTE Not all service plans support When you have unretrieved voicemail messages. 1 Go to your Today screen. a notification screen appears. or you can dismiss the notification and retrieve the messages later. • When you have a new voicemail message.

the active call info appears on your Today screen. Use the built-in speakerphone: Press Menu (right action key) and select Speakerphone. six-way conferencing. press Menu (right action key) again and select Speakerphone Off. you can do any of the following: Navigate around the Today screen: Use Up and Down to move around or highlight items. 42 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? . press Dismiss (right action key). To turn the speakerphone off. including call waiting. press Listen (left action key). • What can I do during a call? Your smartphone offers many advanced telephone features. These features depend on your service plan.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE • To hear your message now. When you make or receive a call. Caller’s name and number Current duration of call During a call. Please contact your wireless service provider for more information. and call forwarding. To take the call off hold. Put the call on hold: Press Hold (left action key). press Off Hold (left action key). To retrieve your message later.

How can you tell which kind of network you’re connected to? See What are all those icons? NOTE Some wireless service providers do Ending a call Do one of the following: • • Press Power/End . After two minutes. Press the headset button (if the headset is attached and has a button on it). Switching applications during an active call You can use many other applications on your smartphone while holding a phone conversation. the screen dims. check with your wireless service provider for information. see Opening and closing applications. you can perform simultaneous voice and data functions. Press any key. This is a great way to stay connected with colleagues during a long call. You cannot. To open an application. make some data connections during an active call while connected to a GPRS network. Switch to another application: Press Start and select the application. it dims more. however.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Press Menu (right action key) and select Mute. press Menu (right action key) again and select Cancel Mute. press Phone/Send to return to your Today screen. If you’re connected to a UMTS or HSDPA network. If you’re connected to a GPRS network. to light up the screen. not support simultaneous voice and data functions over an HSDPA network. or send and receive email or MMS messages while on a voice call. From any application. DID YOU KNOW? When a call lasts longer than one minute. WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 43 . To turn the microphone back on. Some headsets do not have a button. including the organizer and text message features. DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages during a call. except Power/End. you cannot browse the web.

To add this number to an existing contact. TIP You can also save contact info from other applications. TIP If you disable the Add Contact prompt. press Menu (right action key) and select Preferences > Phone Settings. • • • Making a second call You can make a second call while your first call is still active: 1 Place your first call on hold by pressing Hold (left action key). follow these steps to add it later: 1 Go to the Call Log (see Other ways of making calls). and then select Save to Contacts. press Dismiss (left action key). To disable the Add Contact prompt. 44 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? . 2 Highlight the number you want to save. To decline adding the number. 4 Enter the information for the entry. select Copy and Add. select Don’t show this again. check the After calls from numbers that are not in Contacts. 5 Press OK . select Create New Contact. On the Phone tab. 3 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. • To create a new contact for this number. you do not see the Add Contact prompt. such as Messaging. ask if I want to add them box. and then select a contact name.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Saving phone numbers After you hang up a call. you can add the number of the person you were talking with to Contacts if it's not already in your list. From your Today screen. you can turn it on again. If you don’t add a number right away. If an incoming call uses caller ID blocking.

and then choose to answer or ignore the new call. your Today screen includes two call status sections. Hang up the current call and answer the new call: Press Menu (right action key) and select Drop and Answer. When two calls are active. After you have answered the call: Answering a second call (call waiting) When you’re on a call and you receive a second call. you must first use the 5-way to select the Dial Lookup field. Place the current call on hold and answer the new call: Press Answer (left action key) or Phone/Send . You can also press Power/End to hang up the current call. Send the new call to voicemail: Press Menu (right action key) and select Ignore. If you’re dialing by contact name or with the keyboard. each representing one of the calls. A new text message opens with the phone number of the caller entered in the To field. The second call is sent to voicemail. the call waiting notification appears if you have chosen to be notified (see Setting call waiting notification). Send the new caller a text message: Press Menu (right action key) and select Ignore with text message.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER 2 Dial a second number using any of the methods described in Making calls from the Today screen. You can do any of the following: WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 45 .

The number of calls you can join in conference depends on your service plan. 2 Press Conference (right action key). Please contact your wireless service provider for more information. and then • 46 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? . or put the first call on hold and make a second call (see Making a second call). and minutes in your mobile account may be deducted for each call. selecting Extract. See Making a conference call. 3 (Optional) Do one or more of the following: • • Making a conference call IMPORTANT You can join up to 5 calls into a 6-way conference call. This joins the two calls with you in a conference. Make the calls a conference call. The number of calls you can join in conference depends on your service plan. Additional charges may apply.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 1 Answer a second call (see Answering a second call (call waiting)). • Press Swap (left action key) to move between callers by placing the current active call on hold and talking on the other line. Make more calls and join them into the conference call. Extract a caller from the conference call to talk with them privately by pressing Menu (right action key).

press Power/End twice to hang up on all calls or press Power/End once to hang up on the active call. select Preferences. 4 When you’re done. The extracted call becomes the active call. WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 47 . additional charges may apply.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER selecting the name. and then select Call Forwarding from the list. 5 Press OK . Forwarding calls You can forward calls to another phone number. and then select Phone Settings. Please check with your wireless service provider about availability and pricing of forwarded calls. 2 Press Menu (right action key). BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). the call forwarding icon appears in the title bar. 4 Set your call forwarding settings. When all calls are forwarded. Some of the settings are already set by your wireless service provider to send your calls to Voicemail. 1 Go to your Today screen. 3 Select the Services tab. • Swap between the conference call and the private call by pressing Swap (left action key).

Creating a speed-dial button You can create up to 20 picture buttons and 50 text buttons. so you cannot assign E as a Quick Key to another speed-dial button. The letter equivalent for that key is E. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select New Speed Dial. you can press and hold the Quick Key to instantly dial this number. and then select Number and enter the phone number you want to dial with this button. 3 Do one of the following: • 4 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key. Select Label and enter a name for this button. For example. the voicemail Quick Key is 1. and then select the number you want to dial with this button.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Defining speed-dial buttons Your smartphone enables you to create both picture and text speed-dial buttons so that you can select a button on the Today screen to quickly dial a number. select the contact you want to link to this button. Quick Keys can be letters or numbers. If this button is not linked to a contact or the contact doesn’t have a Select Link to contact. 1 Go to your Today screen. When the Today screen is showing. but you can’t use both the letter and number on the same key. select either Text Speed Dial or Picture Speed Dial to indicate which type of button you want to create. 5 If this button is linked to a contact entry with a picture. • 48 DEFINING SPEED-DIAL BUTTONS .

7 Press OK . Dial extra digits automatically: Dials predefined Extra Digits immediately after dialing the phone number. Plays the next message. Repeats the current message.). When this option is checked. 2 Highlight the speed-dial button you want to edit. you need to press Extra Digits (left action key) to dial these digits. If you 3 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. Editing a speed-dial button 1 Go to your Today screen. Deletes the current message. Show voice mail buttons: Displays the voicemail playback controls after you dial this speed-dial number. you can enter the following symbols: star ( ) and pound (#). Plays the current message. enter a comma (. the Picture Speed Dial option is not available. TIP do not check this box. See Adding a contact. In addition to numbers. To enter a one* second pause. and then select Edit Speed Dial. Plays the previous message. you can enter numbers below each control to tailor the controls to your voicemail system. You can add a special ringtone to a contact associated with the speed-dial button. DEFINING SPEED-DIAL BUTTONS 49 . Saves the current message. 6 (Optional) Select the Advanced tab and set any of the following options: Extra Digits: Defines additional numbers to dial. such as a password or extension.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER picture.

4 Press Delete (right action key). 50 USING A PHONE HEADSET . 3 Highlight the button you want to move. 5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. and then select Edit Speed Dial. Using a phone headset You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. Make such a call only if it is legal to do so and you can do so safely. 4 Press Option + Left or Right or Up or Down to move the button in that direction. Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises. Deleting a speed-dial button 1 Go to your Today screen. 5 Press OK TIP . If you must use the wired headset while driving.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 4 Make the desired changes. 2 Highlight the speed-dial button you want to delete. place a speaker in only one ear. Arranging your speed-dial buttons 1 Go to your Today screen. smartphone is permitted where you are and you need to make a call. 3 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Speed Dial Options. IMPORTANT If driving while using a You can also edit a speed-dial button by pressing Menu and selecting Speed Dial Options. You can use either the headset that came with your smartphone or a compatible third-party headset. and then selecting the button you want to edit. we recommend using a phone headset or a hands-free car kit (sold separately).

and it performs various actions based on the situation. When in doubt. USING A PHONE HEADSET 51 . your headset may be incompatible with your smartphone.5mm. ask the third-party headset manufacturer if the product is compatible with your smartphone. If you hear a headset buzz or poor microphone performance.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Using a wired headset Microphone Headset button Speakers The headset button is context-sensitive. 3-pin connector (look for two colored bands on the plug). You can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks: • • • • NOTE Your smartphone works with Answer an incoming call Respond to call waiting Hang up all calls Swap between calls headsets that have a 2.

After you set up a connection with a Bluetooth headset or hands-free car kit.palm. the one you connected to your smartphone last becomes the active device. you can communicate with that device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. and then tap Bluetooth . and then select New Partnership. Be sure to find out if the device has a predefined 52 USING A PHONE HEADSET . 3 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth feature. passkey that you need to enter on your smartphone in step 7 . go to www. For a list of compatible hands-free devices with Bluetooth wireless technology.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free device Your smartphone is also compatible with many headsets and car kits (sold separately) enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology version 1. 4 Select the Devices tab.1 or 1. 1 If necessary. The maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet). The range varies greatly.com/treo750-support. Check the device’s documentation for details. DID YOU KNOW? If you have both a compatible Bluetooth headset and a car kit. 2 Go to your Today screen.2. prepare the device with which you want to connect to accept a new connection. depending on environmental factors.

and then press Next (right action key). USING A PHONE HEADSET 53 . DID YOU KNOW? The Bluetooth icon on your Today screen indicates the status of the Bluetooth feature: Gray = Bluetooth off. and then press Next (right action key). If your hands-free device has one. have a predefined passkey. 8 If the passkey is not predefined. 7 Enter a passkey between 1 and 16 digits long. and then press Finish (right action key). In either case. enter the same passkey on the other Bluetooth device.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices 5 Wait for your smartphone to search for devices and to display the device list. Blue = Bluetooth on. The longer the passkey. you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits. you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and your hands-free device. White = Connected to a Bluetooth device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. to improve the security of your smartphone. the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. Headset icon = Call in progress with a Bluetooth headset or car kit. where possible. 6 Select the device you want to connect to.

Here are tips for working with a Bluetooth hands-free device: • (Bluetooth headset or car kit required. The maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet). To transfer a call from a wired headset to a Bluetooth headset or car kit that is within range and with which you’ve previously set up a partnership Customizing phone settings Selecting ringtones and display notices You can set different tones for different types of incoming phone calls and notifications. To transfer a call from the handset to a Bluetooth hands-free device during a call. AMR. The range varies greatly. and then press Finish (right action key). • You can now communicate with this device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. go to www.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 9 Check the Hands Free box. and WMA ringtones directly to your smartphone (see • 54 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS . sold separately). Bluetooth range is up to 10 meters (30 feet) in optimum environmental conditions. unplug the wired headset and press the button on the Bluetooth headset or car kit. To find out how to transfer your contacts from your smartphone to your car kit. Using a Bluetooth hands-free device To learn how to set up and connect to Bluetooth devices. press Menu (right action key) and select Cancel Bluetooth. depending on environmental factors. You can download MP3.com/ treo750-support. To transfer the call back to the headset. press Menu (right action key) and select Connect Bluetooth. see Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free device. MIDI. WAV. your smartphone routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the earpiece on your smartphone.palm. 10 Press OK . DID YOU KNOW? If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device and it is within range.

Phone: Roaming: A call that comes in when you’re outside your home mobile network. You can also download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your phone. 5 If you selected Known Caller. 3 Select the Notifications tab. 1 Press Start and select Settings. select the ring type and the ringtone. • Check the Play Sound box if you want to have a sound played when the event occurs. Phone: Voice mail: A new voicemail. Phone: Unknown Caller: An incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts list or Speed Dial list. select Sounds & Notifications . 4 Select the Event list. Roaming. 6 If you selected Missed call or Voice mail. set the following options: Phone: Missed call: A call you did not answer.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER Downloading files and images from a web page). and then select which type of call or notification for which you want to set the ringtone: Phone: Known Caller: An incoming call from someone in your Contacts list or Speed Dial list. or Unknown Caller. CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 55 . Select the Play icon to preview the ringtone sound. 2 On the Personal tab.

• • Call volume: While a call is in progress. 9 Press OK . delete. 56 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS . You can also set sounds for messaging notifications and calendar reminders. press the Volume button to adjust ringer volume. You can also check the Repeat box to have the sound repeat. Check the Display message on screen box to have a message displayed when the event occurs. DID YOU KNOW? You can record. preview. press the Volume button (on the side of your smartphone) to adjust the call volume. (right action key) 2 Select the contact’s name. (Optional) Select the Play icon to preview the sound. and select Contacts.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE • If you checked the Play Sound box. See Selecting Sounds & Notifications. Ringer volume: When a call is not in progress and you are not playing music or a video. then select the sound for the selected type of call. Assigning a caller ID ringtone 1 Press Start 3 Press Menu and select Edit. 8 Repeat steps 4–7 to select ringtones for other types of calls. Adjusting call and ringer volume • • Volume 7 Check the Vibrate when… boxes to turn the vibrate feature on/off based on the Ringer switch setting. and send sounds on your smartphone.

Check with your wireless service provider for information. Be sure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission. Adding contact numbers from new callers By default. or who have speech or language disabilities. you are prompted to add contact entries for numbers that are not support the TTY feature on your smartphone. NOTE When TTY/TDD is on.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER 4 Select Ring tone. 3 On the Phone tab. NOTE Not all wireless service providers BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on your phone to access your Phone Settings. 6 Select OK. a TTY/TDD icon appears at the top of the Today screen. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine. Enabling TTY You can enable your smartphone for use with a TTY/TDD device. to communicate by telephone. 2 On the Personal tab. See Turning your phone on. select Phone . and then select either On or Off. CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 57 . 1 Press Start and select Settings. 4 Press OK . select the TTY/TDD list. headset. A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that enables people who are deaf or hard of hearing.. 5 Select a tone for this contact entry. or hands-free kit to your smartphone through the headset jack while in TTY/TDD mode. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information. Your smartphone is compatible with select TTY devices.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need to do the . . and then select Phone Settings. International: All outgoing international calls are blocked. 5 Select the Block outgoing calls list. 4 Press OK Blocking calls You can block incoming or outgoing calls. • • 1 Go to your Today screen. 2 Press Menu (right action key). 58 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS . Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 1 Press Start and select Settings.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE already in your Contacts list. and then select Call Barring from the list. 3 Select the Services tab. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. select Preferences. following: • Make sure that call barring is supported by your service plan. and then select one of the options: Off: No incoming calls are blocked. Get a call barring password from your wireless service provider. All calls: All incoming calls are blocked. You can turn this feature on or off. 2 On the Personal tab. ask if I want to add them box. and then select one of the options: Off: No outgoing calls are blocked. select Phone 3 On the Phone tab. 4 Select the Block incoming calls list. When roaming: All incoming calls are blocked when roaming. check the After calls from numbers that are not in Contacts.

Setting caller ID You can turn caller ID on or off. CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 59 . 3 Select the Services tab. and then select Caller ID from the list. and then select Phone Settings. and then select Call Waiting. Setting call waiting notification You can choose to be notified when you receive a call while you are on a call. 7 Enter the call barring password and select Done (right action key).YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER International except to home country: All outgoing international calls are blocked except to the country where the phone is based. 5 Press OK . You can choose to accept the call or not. 4 Select the appropriate option to provide your caller ID to Everyone or No one. select Preferences. 2 Press Menu (right action key). BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 2 Press Menu (right action key). All calls: All outgoing calls are blocked. phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 3 Select the Services tab. 6 Press OK . BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your 1 Go to your Today screen. and then select Phone Settings. 1 Go to your Today screen. See Answering a second call (call waiting). select Preferences.

and then select Band Selection from the list. 3 Select the Services tab. select Preferences. phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 1 Go to your Today screen. UMTS: Connects only to UMTS or HSDPA networks. 4 Select the Select network type list. and then select Phone Settings. Do not change this setting unless instructed to do so by a representative from your wireless service provider. 60 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS . Manually selecting your wireless band IMPORTANT The wireless band setting is preset for optimum performance. and then select either Auto or one of the bands listed. 5 Select the Select your GSM/UMTS Band list. GSM: Connects only to GSM networks. 2 Press Menu (right action key). The band options differ depending on your wireless service provider.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 4 Select the appropriate option to receive notification or not. and then select one of the following: 5 Press OK . BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your Auto: Automatically selects a network.

you need the PUK2 (pin unblocking key) to unlock the SIM card. Do not change this setting unless instructed to do so by a CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 61 . Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). Get your PIN2 from your wireless service provider 5 Press Menu (right action key) to add. select Preferences. and then select Fixed Dialing. After the service is activated. 3 Select the Services tab. IMPORTANT The network setting is preset for optimum performance. delete. or edit the phone numbers in the list.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER 6 Press OK . • Manually selecting your network settings 1 Go to your Today screen. The list is protected by a PIN2 code. 4 Check the Enable fixed dialing box. you can call and send messages only to the phone numbers from the list. 6 Enter your PIN2 and press Done (left action key). BEFORE YOU BEGIN • 2 Press Menu (right action key). Contact your wireless service provider for more information and your PIN2 and PUK2. Enabling fixed dialing Fixed dialing allows you to restrict your outgoing calls and messages to selected phone numbers included in your fixed dialing list. and then select Phone Settings. If you enter an incorrect PIN2 more times than allowed by your wireless service provider. After the SIM card locks. the SIM card locks. 7 Press OK .

select Find Network and select an available network. What are all those icons? You can monitor the status of several items using icons at the top of your Today screen: You missed an incoming call. and then select your order of preference. 3 Select the Network tab. 5 To change your preferred network. 2 Press Menu (right action key). 1 Go to your Today screen. check the box You have a voicemail message. phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 4 To switch to another network. Manual: Network connections are manually made. select an option: Automatic: The network connection is automatically made. You have a new email message. select Set Networks. and then select Phone Settings.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE representative from your wireless service provider. 6 From the Network Selection list. 7 Press OK . select a network from the list of available networks. select Preferences. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your next to the networks you want. If you are manually selecting a network. 62 WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS? .

Your phone is connected to a GPRS (EDGE if available) network. No SIM card is inserted or software is unable to recognize the SIM. ActiveSync synchronization is in progress. Your phone is on. but you are not actively transmitting data.YOUR PHONE 3 CHAPTER You have a new text. Your phone is connected to a UMTS or HSDPA network. The stronger the signal. WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS? 63 . Your phone is off. A voice call is in progress. The bars display the signal strength. A data connection is not available or your phone is off. the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area. TTY/TDD is turned on. You can make and receive calls and transmit data simultaneously. You can still make or receive calls. Your smartphone is connecting to a computer or network. or multimedia message. but the data transmission is automatically interrupted. You have more than one of the conditions listed above. Your smartphone’s battery is low. You can still make or receive calls. Your phone is on and a UMTS or HSDPA data connection is active. no bars appear. You can still make or receive calls. All calls are being forwarded. but you are not actively transmitting data. Your phone is on and a GPRS (EDGE if available) data connection is active.

name The Bluetooth wireless technology status indicator appears in gray when this feature is off. Wireless Your phone is on. ® A call is in progress and your smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth headset or car kit. Your smartphone is connected to a power outlet and the battery is fully charged.3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Your smartphone’s battery is charging. When you turn service off your phone. and in reverse blue when your smartphone is communicating with another Bluetooth device. in blue when this feature is on. 64 WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS? . Phone Off provider appears instead.

Benefits • Quickly enter and update information on your computer and your smartphone Protect your information • Send photos and videos to your smartphone from your desktop computer • . There’s no need to enter information twice. so you don’t even have to think about it.CHAP TE R 4 Synchronizing information Synchronizing means that information that has been entered or updated in one place—your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone. After you get into the habit of synchronizing regularly. or your corporate server—is automatically updated in the other. and backing up large amounts of information on your smartphone. Some types of synchronization can happen on an automated schedule. updating. your computer. you’ll know what a powerful tool synchronization is for transferring.

. . . . . . . . 68 What can I synchronize? . . . .In this chapter Synchronization overview. 81 Setting synchronization options . . . . 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Other ways to synchronize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Synchronizing using the sync cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . 67 How do I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . 75 Setting up wireless synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you set up ActiveSync synchronization with your computer. videos. Excel. there’s no need to enter the info twice. For synchronization of music and videos. Your info is then automatically updated in both places. customize sync settings to suit your needs and sync only some of these applications. you also must have Windows Media Player 10 on your computer. You can also change settings to synchronize Word. By default. PowerPoint. and other types of files (see Changing which applications sync). information in the Favorites application is synchronized by default as well. ® You can. ® Synchronization enables you to enter or change information on your smartphone or in Microsoft Office Outlook®. music. however. as well as pictures. the info from the following applications is synchronized for either method of synchronization: SYNCHRONIZATION OVERVIEW 67 . and PDF files.SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER Synchronization overview This chapter discusses using ActiveSync desktop software and other methods to synchronize your smartphone and your computer. This is true whether you sync with your computer using ActiveSync desktop software (see Setting up your computer for synchronization) or wirelessly with your company’s Exchange Server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see Setting up wireless synchronization).

and then select Windows Media Player. or you may be able to By connecting your smartphone to your computer using the sync cable (see Synchronizing using the sync cable) Wirelessly. You must install this software even if you have already installed a previous version of ActiveSync desktop software. it creates a folder in your computer’s web browser called Mobile Favorites that backs up any favorites you create in the browser on your smartphone. of course. you can choose to synchronize in any of the following ways: • How do I synchronize? There are a number of ways to make synchronization occur. You can. If you install ActiveSync desktop software from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. You can add or remove favorites directly to or from the folder. You can install ActiveSync desktop software on your computer to synchronize in one of a number of ways.4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION When you sync Favorites. DID YOU KNOW? TIP synchronize wirelessly with an Exchange Server. which came with your smartphone. you can install it from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. You can set up your smartphone to use any combination of wireless sync. ActiveSync synchronization. See Installing the desktop synchronization software for instructions. choose to sync both with an Exchange Server and with ActiveSync desktop software to maximize your sync options. select Add Programs. Insert the CD into your computer’s CD drive. and Windows Media Player sync. using the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology on your smartphone (see Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection) • 68 HOW DO I SYNCHRONIZE? . Synchronizing with ActiveSync desktop software BEFORE YOU BEGIN Install the software If you don’t already have Windows Media Player installed on your computer. from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc.

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER • Wirelessly. If you choose this method. which came with your smartphone. What can I synchronize? This table lists the types of info you can synchronize and the methods to use. and other info directly with your computer. You need ActiveSync to synchronize pictures. Info type Outlook Contacts. videos. synchronization takes place automatically after setup. Tasks Method ActiveSync (sync with computer) or Exchange ActiveSync (direct sync with server) ActiveSync or Exchange ActiveSync ActiveSync desktop software from the CD even if you synchronize wirelessly with the server. Calendar. music files. Where to learn more Setting up your computer for synchronization or Setting up wireless synchronization Setting up your computer for synchronization or Setting up wireless synchronization Outlook Email WHAT CAN I SYNCHRONIZE? 69 . using the infrared (IR) port on your smartphone (see Synchronizing over an infrared connection) NOTE We recommend that you install Synchronizing wirelessly with the server You can set up your smartphone to synchronize email and other information wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see Setting up wireless synchronization). You do not need to install the software from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc.

4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION Info type Word. Excel. PDF files Method ActiveSync Where to learn more Setting up your computer for synchronization Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files Changing which applications sync Music and video files ActiveSync and Windows Media Player 10 Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Transferring media files to your smartphone Pictures ActiveSync Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Outlook Notes ActiveSync Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Files to be transferred to an expansion card ActiveSync Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync 70 WHAT CAN I SYNCHRONIZE? . PowerPoint.

• • • • SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 71 . Before you can synchronize. when you synchronize.SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER Setting up your computer for synchronization Why set up a connection between your smartphone and your computer? So you can synchronize them. Even if you have already installed a previous version of ActiveSync desktop software. you must install the software that came with your smartphone on the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. Whether you enter or change information on your computer using Microsoft Office Outlook or on your smartphone. Should anything happen to your smartphone. You have a backup copy of all your info. System requirements Your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements: • • Windows 2000 or XP (later versions may also be supported) 32MB of available memory (RAM) 170MB of free hard disk space CD drive Available USB port We strongly recommend that you synchronize your smartphone with your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations. Why synchronize? Here are two good reasons: • TIP If you want to synchronize with a personal information manager (PIM) other than Microsoft Office Outlook. you need to install the desktop synchronization software and connect the sync cable to your computer. you don’t need to enter it again on your smartphone. you automatically update the info in both places. your info still exists on your computer. After you enter info on your computer. you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is available for your smartphone.

2 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc into the CD drive on your computer. including those running in the background. as described in the next section. you connect your smartphone to your computer and sync for the first time. calendar events. see Connecting your smartphone to your computer and Synchronizing information. you are prompted to enter your mail server address and domain name and your Exchange Server account username and password. synchronization happens automatically anytime you connect your smartphone to your computer.4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION • USB sync cable (included with your smartphone) Installing the desktop synchronization software BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing computer and your smartphone. make sure your company allows you to install new software. and tasks directly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. Contact your company’s IT department for help. Using ActiveSync desktop software After you install ActiveSync desktop software. Be sure to watch what’s happening on both your During software installation. you can open the ActiveSync window on your computer to do tasks such as the following: • Install applications from your computer to your smartphone (see Installing 72 SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION . DID YOU KNOW? the software on a computer at work. contacts. TIP You can also install additional software from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc (see Installing bonus software from the CD). Your computer must have all its resources available to install the software. you can select an option to synchronize email. However. During installation. 3 Follow the installation instructions on your computer. 1 Close any applications that are currently running on your computer. If you choose this option. For more info.

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

4
CHAPTER

applications from your computer) or to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot on your smartphone (see Installing applications onto an expansion card)
• •

TIP

If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in the taskbar, go to Start, navigate to Programs, and then select Microsoft ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window. You can enter a setting to have the ActiveSync window open automatically when you connect your computer and your smartphone. On the ActiveSync window, select File, select Connection Settings, and then check the Open ActiveSync when my device connects box.

Change which applications synchronize Enter settings to synchronize wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003

TIP

DID YOU KNOW? You can also change which applications synchronize (see Changing which applications sync) and enter settings to synchronize wirelessly (see Setting up wireless synchronization) in the ActiveSync app on your smartphone. Whether you enter changes on your smartphone or your computer, the changes are transferred to the other location the next time you synchronize.

To open the ActiveSync window, double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen.

Desktop software installation also creates a Mobile Device folder on your computer, which you can see when you open My Computer or Windows Explorer. When your smartphone is connected to your computer, opening the Mobile Device folder displays an icon representing your smartphone. It also displays folders containing items you synchronized, such as music files, pictures, and videos.

SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION

73

4
CHAPTER

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

Connecting your smartphone to your computer
NOTE If you’re transferring info from a

previous Windows Mobile® device or from a Palm OS device, you can learn more about how to move content, such as pictures, music, and files, to your smartphone by going to www.palm.com/ treo750-support.
®

TIP For best performance, plug your sync cable directly into a USB port on your computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we suggest using the back port. If you use a USB hub, make sure it’s a powered hub.

1 If international adapters are included in your smartphone package, prepare the AC charger by connecting the adapter that fits the wall outlet you’re going to use. 2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet. 3 Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or into a powered USB hub on your computer.

4 Connect the sync cable to your smartphone by inserting it into the two sockets to the left on the bottom of the smartphone. 5 Connect the charger cable to the remaining socket on the bottom of your smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW?

The AC charger contains an indicator light that glows when the charger is connected to a power source.

74

SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

4
CHAPTER

USB sync cable

This button has no function with your smartphone

Synchronizing using the sync cable
After you install ActiveSync desktop software, synchronization takes place automatically anytime your smartphone is

connected to your computer and info is updated in either location. 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer (see Connecting your smartphone to your computer). You should hear the ActiveSync tone.

SYNCHRONIZING USING THE SYNC CABLE

75

4
CHAPTER

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

TIP We recommend that you install the backup and restore app from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. A backup and restore app preserves your data and settings if your smartphone is ever lost or stolen, and it protects your data during a hard reset.

This button has no function with your smartphone 2 Look for the ActiveSync icon at the top of your smartphone screen and the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on your computer.

Setting up wireless synchronization
Does your company use Microsoft Outlook as its email solution? Does your company also use Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 as its email server? If so, you may be able to wirelessly synchronize the email and other Outlook info on your smartphone and the same info stored on the Exchange Server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. When the Exchange Server is upgraded to Service Pack 2, you may be able to take advantage of the additional features of Direct Push Technology. Direct Push Technology is a two-way wireless delivery method that keeps your Outlook information always up-to-date and provides

If you don’t see the ActiveSync icon, make sure the desktop synchronization software that came with your smartphone is running on your computer. If you have any problems synchronizing, see Synchronization for troubleshooting suggestions.

76

SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

4
CHAPTER

more efficient communication between the server and your smartphone. It includes features like Global Address List; Tasks Over The Air (OTA); and IP-based push updating of Calendar, Messaging, and Email.
DID YOU KNOW? Because your desktop copy of Outlook also syncs with the server, whatever is synchronized to the server from your smartphone also shows up in Outlook; and whatever you enter or change in Outlook on your computer syncs to the server and then shows up on your smartphone.

TIP

If you installed ActiveSync desktop software, you may have already set up your smartphone to synchronize wirelessly with the server. To check, press Start, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync. Press Menu (right action key). If Configure Server appears instead of Add Server Source, wireless sync is already set up, and you can skip this procedure.

1 Press Start

and select Programs. .

2 Select ActiveSync

3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Add Server Source. 4 Enter the server address. Check the box if your server uses an encrypted connection. Press Next (right action key).

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To synchronize wirelessly, you need to set up an Exchange Server Account. Work with your system administrator to gather the following info, and then follow the steps in this section to set up an account:
• •

Mail server address and domain name. The username and password you use to access your corporate mail server. Security connection: Does your server use an encrypted (SSL) connection?

SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION

77

4
CHAPTER

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

5 Enter the username and password you use to access your corporate mail server, and enter the Exchange Server domain.

TIP Ask your system administrator if it is OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone (for increased security, you may need to enter your password each time you access your email). If it is not OK, you must synchronize manually (see Initiating a wireless sync manually).

7 (Optional) Select Advanced to set the rules for fixing sync conflicts. 8 Press Next (right action key) and check the boxes for the types of information you want to synchronize with the Exchange Server. You can’t see your password as you enter it, so be careful. Be sure Caps Lock and Option Lock are not on unless you need them. For info on how to enter characters, see Entering lowercase and uppercase letters and Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols.
TIP

The Exchange Server settings are casesensitive. Be sure to enter uppercase and lowercase letters properly.

6 Check the Save password box.

9 (Optional) Highlight one of the items and select Settings to change the synchronization settings for that type

78

SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION

wireless sync takes place anytime info is updated on either your smartphone or the server using Direct Push Technology. 2 Select ActiveSync SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION 79 . or allow synchronization to take place only when you initiate it manually (see Initiating a wireless sync manually). If your Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is not upgraded to Service Pack 2: By default. You can set a schedule for synchronization to take place anytime info is updated on either your smartphone or the server or at certain intervals (see Setting the synchronization schedule). To automatically download more of an incoming email message than the default setting. To save battery life. you can set synchronization to take place at intervals that you specify. select E-mail in step 9 and increase the KB setting. 10 Press Finish (right action key). you can manually download the rest of the message at your convenience. . If you don’t increase this setting.SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER of information. 1 Press Start and select Programs. A status bar appears onscreen. TIP Setting the synchronization schedule You can set a synchronization schedule in either of the following situations: If your Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is upgraded to Service Pack 2: By default. or at certain intervals. wireless sync does not take place automatically. Set a synchronization schedule to have sync take place either anytime info is updated on your smartphone or the server. however. indicating sync progress. Settings are not available for all items. Synchronization with your Exchange Server begins automatically.

or if it is not OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone. You should keep this box checked to ensure that wireless sync works properly. Send outgoing items immediately: Sets whether items are sent as soon as you select Send in the Inbox application. In the Peak times and Off-peak times lists. 4 Set any of the following options: Peak times: Sets the frequency for high-traffic time periods such as when you are at work or when email volume is high. select Manual. 5 Press OK . 3 Select ActiveSync 4 Press Sync . (left action key). Off-peak times: Sets the frequency for low-traffic time periods such as late at night. Use above settings while roaming: Sets the frequency while you are roaming outside your wireless service provider’s network. you can initiate sync manually. 80 SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION . press Start and select Programs. Initiating a wireless sync manually If you want to control exactly when a wireless sync takes place. 1 To set up manual sync. follow the preceding procedure. 2 To initiate a manual sync. Setting the synchronization schedule. or whether they are held until the next synchronization.4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Schedule.

SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER Other ways to synchronize Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection You can wirelessly synchronize your computer and smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. 9 If this is the first time you’re making a Bluetooth connection to this computer. 4 Select the Connections tab. 5 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone. insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc into your computer’s CD drive. 3 On your smartphone. and then select Bluetooth. right-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in OTHER WAYS TO SYNCHRONIZE 81 . BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: • the lower-right corner of the screen. 1 On your computer. press Start and select Settings. • 8 Press Menu (right action key) and select Connect via Bluetooth. Select the plug-in option on the Add Programs screen and follow the onscreen instructions. 6 Press Start and select Programs. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology for more information on partnerships. If you did not do so during initial setup. 2 Check the Allow connections for one of the following box. follow the onscreen prompts to set up a Bluetooth partnership with this computer. and then select Add Programs. 7 Select ActiveSync Make sure your computer is equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. install the ActiveSync Plug-in for Bluetooth wireless technology from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. and then select Bluetooth . and select Connection Settings. 10 Select Sync. TIP To install the plug-in for Bluetooth technology. .

press Start and select Programs. 3 On your smartphone. 82 OTHER WAYS TO SYNCHRONIZE . you can synchronize with your computer wirelessly using the IR port on your smartphone. 2 Point the IR port directly on your smartphone at your computer’s IR port.4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 11 When synchronization has finished. The contacts and calendar appointments from both computers are on your device. • The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C1 are now also on C2. 6 Select Sync. 4 Select ActiveSync . The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C2 are now also on C1. ® ® 1 Set up your computer to receive infrared beams. Turn on your smartphone’s IR functionality (see Beaming information). you get the following results: • Make sure your computer is equipped with an IR port. When synchronizing with multiple computers. if you set up to sync your smartphone with two computers named C1 and C2. the items that you synchronize appear on all the computers. press Menu (right action key) and select Disconnect Bluetooth. 5 Press Menu (right action key) and select Connect via IR. See ActiveSync Help on your computer for details. when you sync Contacts and Calendar on your smartphone with both computers. For example. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • Synchronizing with multiple computers You can set up your smartphone to synchronize with up to two computers as well as with Exchange Server 2003. Synchronizing over an infrared connection If your computer has an IR (infrared) port. • • NOTE Microsoft Office Outlook E-mail can synchronize with only one computer.

pictures. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. . follow these steps: 1 Press Start 3 Press Stop TIP and select Programs. 2 Select ActiveSync 2 Select ActiveSync . To stop synchronizing all items on a computer. If you cannot check a box. 1 Press Start and select Programs.SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4 CHAPTER Setting synchronization options Changing which applications sync You must select sync options if you want to synchronize notes. • • Stopping synchronization If you ever need to manually stop synchronization. Uncheck the box next to any items you want to stop synchronizing. SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS 83 . select the computer name and then select Delete. Settings are not available for all items. and other types of files. (left action key). you might have to uncheck a box for the same information type elsewhere in the list. 4 Do any of the following: • Check the box next to any items you want to synchronize. Select an item and then select Settings to customize the settings for that item.

4 CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 84 SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS .

You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience. family. You can send photos to your friends and family. sound files.CHAP TE R 5 Your email You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch. Benefits • Receive photos. or create Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. Word and Excel files. and more Attach and send files of almost any type • • Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time . Now your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends. and colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service provider’s data network.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 . . . . . . 94 Sending email messages from within another application. . . . . . . 87 Sending and receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Working with email messages. . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Setting up email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

• Type of email you can access You can obtain email from an ISP or Internet email account such as EarthLink. make Email account type POP/IMAP You can enter settings for more than one email account. If you want delivery of Outlook email using Direct Push Technology.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER Setting up email You can use the Inbox application to send and receive email. and you can use different email setup applications on your smartphone to enter settings for different accounts. Entering settings for an email account DID YOU KNOW? Make sure your phone is on before you send or receive messages. depending on which app best meets your needs. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • sure that your IT organization has upgraded your Exchange Server 2003 to Service Pack 2. or from a small business or corporate Internet email account. Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages. consult your wireless service provider for pricing and availability of email services and data rate plans. How to set up See Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application. SETTING UP EMAIL 87 .

an email account that you access using a VPN server connection (such as a work account. Hotmail Free web-based email Access the email website directly using your smartphone’s web browser. Wireless email access can be supported if your company is using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. go to www.com/emailsetup for more information. You may need to check with your IT organization to ensure that Exchange ActiveSync® is supported and to obtain the configuration settings. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Work with your email provider or system administrator to gather the following info: • • • • Account type (POP3 or IMAP) Mail server name for receiving mail Mail server name for sending mail Your username and password 88 SETTING UP EMAIL . You can access mail from Yahoo! and other free web-based systems. or any other IMAP or POP email account. See Setting up wireless synchronization. TIP If you have problems configuring your account.5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL Microsoft Exchange Server You can retrieve corporate email using a Microsoft Exchange Server.palm. See Using Pocket MSN. Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application You can set up an account in the Inbox application to send and receive email messages using an email account that you have with an Internet service provider (ISP). You can view your web-based Hotmail email account using Pocket MSN on your smartphone. see Connecting to a VPN (virtual private network)).

For example. change it if needed. and then press Next (right action key). 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > New Account. 2 Press E-mail (left action key). If you want to enter 10 Enter a name for this account. 6 Enter your name. Wait until the Status box displays Completed. username. and then press Next (right action key). check the Save password box. enter “Work” or your company’s name. 7 If you want your password entered automatically. 8 Press Next (right action key). 1 Go to your Today screen. and then select POP3 or IMAP . Check to make sure that the info on each screen is correct. 4 Enter the email address that you want to set up. and password. many of the remaining setup screens will be filled in. 11 Enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers. SETTING UP EMAIL 89 . If the setup process is able to obtain account settings. if this is your work email account. do not check this box. and then press Next (right action key) to move through the screens. and then press Next (right action key). 9 Select the Account type list. 5 The setup process searches an online database to obtain the settings for your account.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER • Any special security requirements your password each time you access this account.

is not needed for POP3 or IMAP accounts. if you need to change the name of the outgoing mail server—press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. To edit an account. 2 Press E-mail DID YOU KNOW? (left action key). 90 SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES . and then select Delete. an asterisk appears next to the accounts you create. NOTE Do not enter anything in Domain. select the account and change the settings you want to edit. Sending and receiving messages Creating and sending an email message 1 Go to your Today screen.5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL DID YOU KNOW? On the Accounts tab in Messaging Options. 12 (Optional) Select Options to select download settings for this account. It TIP To delete an email account or to edit account settings—for example. 13 Press Finish (right action key). 3 Press Left to cycle through your Inbox accounts until you see the right email account name in the title bar. highlight the account you want press and hold Center on the 5-way. To delete an account. You can also access the Inbox application from the Start menu.

you can find the name and add it. Select the type of item you want to attach. press OK . Select the Priority list. You can send an email message with a file attached from directly within other applications on your smartphone. or press Menu (right action key). • SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES 91 . 7 Press Down to go to the body of the message. DID YOU KNOW? When addressing a message. Select Message Options. 8 (Optional) Press Menu (right action key) and select Insert. select a priority setting for the message. and then select a predefined phrase you want to insert. and then press OK . If the recipient’s name is in an online address book. see Sending email messages from within another application. 5 Enter the recipient’s email address. and then select the file or record a voice note. See Using an online address book. Here are some shortcuts: 6 Select Subject and enter a title for the message. When the spell check is complete. Enter your message. select My Text. and then select the recipient’s name. TIP • 9 (Optional) Press Menu (right action key) and do one or both of the following: • Select Spell Check. enter the first few letters of the recipient’s first or last name. you can enter the contact’s first and last initials separated by a space.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER 4 Press New (left action key). • If the recipient’s name and email address are in your Contacts list.

see Connecting to a VPN (virtual private network). • 1 Go to your Today screen. Folders containing subfolders display a +. you can synchronize messages in subfolders you create. turn off the option to save sent messages in the Saved folder. For all other types of accounts. If you use ActiveSync desktop software to synchronize your smartphone with your computer. and then uncheck the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder box. press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. Receiving email messages How you receive email messages depends on the type of account you are using and how you synchronize: • • If you synchronize wirelessly with your Exchange Server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Manage Folders. Select Message. new email messages are sent to your smartphone when they appear on the server. 2 Press E-mail 3 Press Left to cycle through your accounts until the name of the account 92 SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES . Select the + to view the subfolders. In the Inbox. or when you manually initiate a sync (see Initiating a wireless sync manually. In the Inbox. messages in Outlook on your computer are transferred to your smartphone when you connect your computer and your smartphone (see Connecting your smartphone to your computer). follow these steps to send and receive messages: (left action key).5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL 10 Press Send TIP (left action key). TIP If you sync email with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. including ISP accounts and accounts you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account. according to the schedule you set up (see Setting the synchronization schedule). Check the box to the left of any subfolder you want to sync. To save memory on your smartphone.

. 3 Scroll to and select the attachment name (below the subject) to open the attachment. including PDF PDF file attachments open in . see Connecting to a VPN (virtual private network). 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. To store attachments on an expansion card.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER you want to synchronize appears in the title bar. DID YOU KNOW? You can receive and open attachments in a number of different formats. Picsel PDF Viewer on your smartphone. 4 Select E-mail. To automatically download attachments from an IMAP4 email account (typically an ISP account) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account. do the following: 1 Press Start and select Programs. 6 Press OK . SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES 93 . press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. Select Storage and then check the Store attachments on a storage card box. do the following: 1 Go to your Today screen. 4 Press Menu (right action key) and select Send/Receive to synchronize your smartphone with your email server. 2 Press E-mail (left action key). and then select Settings. 5 Check the Include file attachments box. 2 Synchronize the email account that contains the message as described in the previous sections. TIP If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your computer and want to download attachments automatically. Receiving attachments 1 Scroll to the attachment name (below the subject) to highlight it and mark it for download. 4 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. 3 Close any open messages.

including servers running Exchange Server. 7 Press Next twice. the Inbox application checks your contacts list and then the directory service 1 In the message list. Cc. 4 Enter the name of the Directory service. and whether authentication is required for accessing an online address book. 3 Select the address book you want to check for email addresses. • Working with email messages Adding an online address book Many email servers. Embedded images and objects cannot be received as attachments. can verify names with an online address book. 6 Press Next (right action key) until you reach Server information. DID YOU KNOW? to verify names that you enter in the To. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: • Ask your system administrator for the name of the directory service and the server.5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL 5 On the Accounts tab. Note that TNEF must be enabled to receive meeting requests. get attachments. and then select Add. 6 If your server requires authentication. unless you have an IMAP4 email account with TNEF disabled. 5 Enter the server name. and then select Options. press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. 94 WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES . you must first synchronize with the Exchange Server to enable the Global Address List to find a Contact. 2 Select the Address tab. check the box. If your company is using an Exchange Server. and then enter your username and password. After you create and enable an email account. also called a directory service or a Global Address List. and Bcc fields. and then select Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy. select the IMAP4 account name.

1 In a new message. TIP Using an online address book You can access contact information. select each online address book. When sending a meeting request. When you sync with Outlook on your computer. and select Add Recipient. This feature is useful only if you know the exact name as it appears in the directory. You must spell the contact name correctly. 3 Press Menu (right action key). 2 Press Menu (right action key). from your organization’s online address book or Global Address List (GAL). highlight it. make sure you are accessing an Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. and then select Find Online. WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES 95 . disable your online address books to avoid errors. tap the To box. To access a GAL. TIP To delete a directory service. select Attendees.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER 7 (Optional) Check the Check name against this server box to enable this directory service. and then uncheck the Check name against this server box. In Contacts. Be sure to turn this option back on if you synchronize other email accounts. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Forward. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Add an online address book to your smartphone (see Adding an online address book). Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. DID YOU KNOW? You can use the Global Address List to find a contact. press Menu (right action key). such as an email address or phone number. press and hold Center on the 5-way. 8 Select OK. Forwarding a message 1 Open the message you want to forward. and then select Delete. Select Address. and select Find Online. 4 Enter the contact name as it appears in the directory and tap Find. press Menu (right action key). and then select Find Online.

8 Press OK . 3 On the Accounts tab.5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL 3 Address the message and enter any text you want to add. 96 WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES . 1 Press E-mail (left action key). 4 Select the Message tab and set any of the following options: 5 Check the box to add this signature to new messages you create with this account. Adding a signature to your messages You can use a different signature with each email account. 6 (Optional) Check the box to add this signature to messages you reply to or forward with this account. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. select Signatures. 4 Press Send (left action key). 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options. the options you choose apply to that account only. 7 Highlight the text “Enter a signature here” and enter the signature text you want to use. 1 Press E-mail (left action key). 2 Press Left to cycle through your accounts until the name of the account you want appears in the title bar. Customizing your email settings When you customize settings for an email account. 4 Select the account for which you want to create a signature.

Verify names using these address books: Indicates which directory services you want to check for email addresses. Add: Enables you to add directory services to the list of online address books. get e-mail addresses from: Indicates whether you want to check Contacts in addition to any directory services for email addresses. include body: Indicates whether the body of a message you received appears in your response to that message. WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES 97 . Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder: Indicates whether messages you send are stored in the Sent folder. 6 Select the Storage tab and set any of the following options: Store attachments on storage card: Indicates whether you want to automatically store email attachments on an expansion card. After deleting or moving a message: Specifies what you want to see after you delete or move an email message.YOUR EMAIL 5 CHAPTER When replying to e-mail. 5 Select the Address tab and set any of the following options: In Contacts.

if you take a picture with the built-in camera on your smartphone. This feature can be used with videos and sound files as well. 7 Press OK .5 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL Sending email messages from within another application Empty deleted items: Indicates whether you want to automatically empty the Deleted folder. For example. You can send files such as pictures. and ringtones as attachments to email messages (see Creating and sending an email message). videos. 98 SENDING EMAIL MESSAGES FROM WITHIN ANOTHER APPLICATION . and when you want this to occur. you can select an option to send the picture as an attachment to an email message. You can send certain files as attachments from within the application where the file is created or stored. see the chapter on the specific application. For details.

use multimedia messaging to give your message extra impact by adding a photo. If you need more than text to express yourself.CHAP TE R 6 Your text and multimedia messages If you need to get a short message to a friend or a co-worker fast. or sound file. send a text message from your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone to their mobile phone or email address. video. Benefits • • Enjoy quick communication Use text messaging to chat with friends • Be as simple or as creative as you want .

101 Customizing the Messaging application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Using Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Using the Messaging application . . . . . . . . .

Creating and sending a text message Each text message can have up to 160 characters. Here are some shortcuts: • If the recipient’s name and mobile number are in your Contacts list. Press Center to view a list of recently used addresses. consult your wireless service provider for pricing and availability of text and multimedia messaging services. the email address is deducted from the 160-character count. and select the recipient from the list. (left action key). If you send a text message to an email address. Select Add Recipient to add a recipient from your Contacts list. 1 Press Start 2 Press New and select Messaging. DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone call. but the message will automatically be split into several messages. You can send a message of more than 160 characters. and then the last initial to find a name. Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages. This is easiest when using a hands-free headset or the speakerphone. type the first few letters of the first or last name or simply enter the first initial. • USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 101 .YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6 CHAPTER Using the Messaging application You can use the Messaging application to send and receive brief text messages (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS). 3 Enter the recipient’s mobile phone number or email address. followed by a space.

6 CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES • If the recipient’s name is in an online address book. see Using an online address book. and then select either the phone number or the email address. enter the full mobile number or email address. If the recipient’s name and mobile number are not in your Contacts list. text. TIP You can also access predefined phrases and emoticons by pressing Menu (right action key) on the message compose screen. press Center . and then edit it. Select the name. or tap and then select a predefined phrase you want to insert. videos. • 6 Press Send (left action key). and then edit the number that appears in the box directly below the contact number. Invalid characters are automatically replaced by the Messaging application. enter the name. TIP Sound clips AMR QCELP 4 Enter your message. For more information. You can include any of the following items: Ringtones • MIDI • • TIP To address a message to multiple recipients. and then select Find Online. separate the addresses by pressing Enter or entering a semicolon (.). Pictures • JPEG • • GIF WBMP • Videos 3GPP 102 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION . press Menu (right action key). select the contact in the To field. To send a message to a different number for a contact. 5 (Optional) Tap and then select an emoticon to add to your message. Creating and sending a multimedia message Multimedia messages consist of pictures. and sounds presented as one or more slides. You can send a message to up to 20 addresses. TIP Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. You can also select a number by pressing Center on the 5-way.

and select the recipient from the list. For more information. press Menu (right action key). If the recipient’s name and mobile number are not in your Contacts list. Add Picture: Enables you to insert a picture. • 3 Enter the recipient’s mobile phone number or email address. but your wireless service provider may change the maximum message size. • 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select New MMS. Here are some shortcuts: • 4 Select Subject and enter a title for the message. 1 Press Start and select Messaging. and then the last initial to find a name. If the recipient’s name is in an online address book. USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 103 . Select Add Recipient to add a recipient from your Contacts list. press Center . type the first few letters of the first or last name or simply enter the first initial. and then select either the phone number or the email address. enter the name. see Using an online address book. and then select Find Online. Outgoing multimedia messages can be up to 300KB by default. 5 Select following: and select one of the If the recipient’s name and mobile number are in your Contacts list. enter the full mobile number or email address.YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6 CHAPTER • • 3GPP2 MPEG4 • followed by a space. Select the name. You can take a new picture with the built-in camera or insert an existing picture. Press Center to view a list of recently used addresses.

7 (Optional) Select Add slide and repeat steps 5–6 to add another slide in this message. add another slide to your message. Press Menu (right action key) and select Slide Timing. such as a ringtone. 8 (Optional) To add a vCard (contact file) to a message. select the sound icon and select Add Picture. and then select Add vCard. Tap to insert a predefined phrase. TIP To preview a multimedia message as the recipient will see it. You can add one sound per slide. or insert an existing sound. If you set options for an individual message. press Menu (left action key). such as a voice caption for a picture. DID YOU KNOW? 6 (Optional) Select Add Text and enter a text caption or message for the slide you inserted. To add a picture to a sound. You can capture a new video with the built-in camera or insert an existing video clip. select the picture thumbnail and select Add Sound. those options override your general preferences for that message only. you can set the length of time each slide is displayed. select Add Media. 104 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION . 9 Press Send (left action key). to send more than one sound in a message. You can set general preferences that apply to all incoming and outgoing messages (see Customizing message settings). To add a sound to a picture. You can add both a picture and a sound clip to the same slide in a message. Add Sound: Enables you to record a message. Setting message options You can set options for individual text and multimedia messages you send. press Menu (right action key) and then select Preview Message. TIP DID YOU KNOW? If you add more than one slide to a message. Tap to insert an emoticon.6 CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES Add Video: Enables you to insert a video.

DID YOU KNOW? Request Delivery/Read Receipt (multimedia messages only): Indicates whether you want to receive confirmation that the message has been delivered or has been read.YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6 CHAPTER 1 On the message compose screen. If privacy mode is on. You can also set your smartphone to notify you when a new text or multimedia message arrives. press Menu . Message notifications include the message text unless you have turned on privacy mode (see Customizing message settings). you can set your smartphone to automatically download new messages or to notify you that messages are ready to download. Validity Period: Indicates how long the message remains available to be sent if the recipient’s phone or email address is not available when you originally send the message. you automatically receive new text messages. 2 Select Message Options. Message Priority (multimedia messages only): Indicates the priority for this message. For example. 4 Press OK . you can set the validity for one hour. if a message contains information that will not be useful to the recipient after an USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 105 . For multimedia messages. Receiving text and multimedia messages When your phone is on and you are in a wireless coverage area. 3 Select any of the following options hour. the notification states only the type of incoming message.

6 CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES The new message notification may include any of the following options: • Viewing/playing a message You can open a message from a notification or from the Inbox of the Messaging application. 106 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION . • • • Press Start and select Messaging. select Play (left action key). select the message you want to view. From the Inbox. 1 Do one of the following to open the message: • Go To: Opens a text message so you can view its full contents. Download: Downloads the full content of a multimedia message. the notification includes the number of messages and the type (text or multimedia). select Go To (for text messages) or View (for multimedia messages). From a notification. If you have multiple messages. Dismiss: Closes the notification and puts the message into your Inbox. View: Opens a multimedia message and plays the included media. playback starts automatically. When you open a multimedia message. To resume playback. • 2 Do any of the following: Pause or resume playback (multimedia message only): Select Pause (left action key).

with no audio. 3 Press OK . See a summary of the message. the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. you can press Right on the 5-way to move to the next slide. select Reply (left action key) to reply to the message. Save the item that is playing (multimedia message only): Press Menu (right action key) and select Save. Call the sender: Press Menu (right action key) and select Call Sender. Add the sender’s information to your Contacts list: Press Menu (right action key) and select Add to Contacts. date. or press Left on the 5-way to move to the previous slide. Using Messaging to chat When you exchange more than one message with a single contact.YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6 CHAPTER Forward the message: Press Menu (right action key) and select Forward. and time: Press Menu (right action key) and select Message Details. When you USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 107 . including sender. Reply to the message: Press Menu (right action key) and select Reply or Reply All. NOTE If the message is a single picture Save the message as a template for other messages: Press Menu (right action key) and select Save as Template. DID YOU KNOW? When viewing a multimedia message containing multiple slides.

and the lower part provides a text entry area. email address. you can dial the number. 3 Enter your message. TIP Only the last 50 messages in a chat session are displayed. or URL. Using links in messages When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number.6 CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES select a chat session from your message list. 2 Do one of the following: Start a new chat: Select a message and reply to it. the upper part of the screen displays all messages you’ve exchanged with this contact. 1 Press Start and select Messaging. 5 In a received message. 1 Open a message in the Inbox or another folder. or click a link to download and open a new multimedia message. Select View older messages near the top of the screen to see earlier messages. select to open a media file. or URL (appears as underlined blue text). send an email message. 2 Select the phone number. Your smartphone automatically opens the appropriate application from the link. 4 Press Send (left action key). Continue an existing chat: Select a message with the Chat icon. 108 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION . or go to the web page immediately. email address.

(right action key) 3 Select By Name or By Date.YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6 CHAPTER Message status icons The status icons that appear next to each message in the Inbox. A message that was delivered with delivery confirmation turned on (Sent folder only). Deleting a single message 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder containing the message you want to delete. A read message with pictures or videos. An urgent message. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Purge. 2 Press Menu and select Sort. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete. Multiple messages exchanged with a single recipient (chat). A read message with sound. 2 Highlight the message. An unread message with pictures or videos. TIP USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 109 . Outbox. A read text message. This icon appears below the message size on the right side of the screen. Unread messages appear in bold. Deleting multiple messages 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder containing the messages you want to delete. and Sent folders indicate the following: An unread text message. Sorting your messages You can sort the messages in any folder by date or by sender. An unread message with sound. 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Messages you’ve read appear in plain text. 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder you want to sort.

110 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION . Automatically download MMS messages: Indicates whether you want to automatically receive multimedia messages. you download multimedia messages while roaming. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. Check the Even when roaming box to download multimedia messages both on your home network and while roaming.6 CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 3 Select the age of messages to be deleted. Confirm message deletions: Indicates whether you want deletion confirmation messages to appear. set any of the following options: 4 Select Purge (left action key). 3 On the Messages tab. NOTE You might incur additional charges if Customizing the Messaging application Customizing message settings 1 Press Start and select Messaging. or select Delete all messages to delete all messages.

YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

6
CHAPTER

Message validity period: Indicates how long messages remain available to be sent if the recipient’s phone or email address is not available when you originally send the message. For example, if your messages generally contain information that will not be useful to recipients after an hour, you can set the validity for one hour. Signature: Enables you to add a signature to outgoing messages. Select the button; then, on the Signature screen, check the Use signatures with new messages box, enter your signature text, and then press OK . 4 Press OK .

3 Select the Chat tab.

4 Select either of the following options: Create chat from messages: Indicates the conditions under which a chat session starts. Show time stamps of each message: Indicates whether you want chat session items to display a date and time indicator. 5 Press OK .

DID YOU KNOW? Options you select for an individual message (see Setting message options) override the general preferences you set for all messages.

Customizing chat settings 1 Press Start and select Messaging. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options.

Customizing notification settings 1 Press Start and select Messaging. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options.

CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION

111

6
CHAPTER

YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

3 Select the Notification tab.

5 Press OK

.

Customizing network settings
IMPORTANT Changing the network

settings can cause the Messaging application to stop working correctly. We recommend that you keep the default network settings. 1 Press Start 4 Select any of the following options: Request MMS receipts: Indicates whether you want to receive a confirmation when a multimedia message is delivered or when it is read. Privacy mode (hide text): Indicates whether you want only the message type displayed on a notification for a single incoming message. If the box is unchecked, the notification displays the text of the message. Acknowledge when messages are received/read: Indicates whether you want a confirmation sent to the sender when you receive or read a multimedia message. 4 Select Manual, and then select Edit. 5 Edit the network settings you want to change. and select Messaging.

2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. 3 Select the Advanced tab.

112

CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION

YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

6
CHAPTER

BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must subscribe
TIP

Select Automatic on the Advanced tab to restore the default settings.

6 Press OK

twice.

to data services from your wireless service provider. You must also have a Windows Live ID (formerly Passport) account or a Hotmail account. If you do not have either of these accounts, do the following:

Using Pocket MSN
Pocket MSN provides quick access to the following:

To create a Windows Live ID account, go to www.passport.com. To create a Hotmail account, go to www.hotmail.com.
TIP

MSN Hotmail: Enables you to read, write, send, and delete email. You can also manage your Hotmail folders. MSN Messenger: Enables you to see who’s online and exchange instant messages (IM). Subscribe to status updates for selected contacts so you’re notified when they’re online. Options: Enables you to customize your Pocket MSN experience.

When you set up a Pocket MSN Hotmail account, you can access that account in the Inbox application. To access your instant messages, use the MSN application or the MSN plug-in on the Today screen.

Signing in to Pocket MSN 1 Press Start and select Programs. 2 Select Pocket MSN.

DID YOU KNOW? You can add Pocket MSN to your Today screen. See Selecting which items appear on your Today screen for details.

USING POCKET MSN

113

6
CHAPTER

YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

5 Enter the email address and password for your Windows Live ID account or your Hotmail account.

3 Select MSN Mobile Home. 4 Select Sign in.

114

USING POCKET MSN

CHAP TE R

7

Your connections to the web and wireless devices
You use the web for so many things: finding driving directions, getting news, buying gifts, checking web-based email. Now, with your wireless service provider’s network and your smartphone’s built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go. The built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology on your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
• •

Carry the web with you Store web pages for offline viewing

Connect to Bluetooth headsets and car kits Connect your computer to the Internet through your smartphone

In this chapter
Browsing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology. . . . . . 124 Using your device as a wireless modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

such as JavaScript and frames. Shockwave. DID YOU KNOW? The security certificates and 128-bit SSL strong encryption enable you to browse secure sites. and cookies.YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER Browsing the web Internet Explorer Mobile provides quick and easy access to web pages. DID YOU KNOW? You can also start a web search from your Today screen by selecting the Web search field. and so on) or Java applets. but does not support plug-ins (Flash. Remember. WML script. banking. 1 Press Start Explorer. BROWSING THE WEB 117 . entering the item you want to find. and select Internet BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: • Be sure to subscribe to data services from your wireless service provider. Ask the organization for an alternate access point that is compatible with Internet Explorer Mobile. You can view most sites you use on your computer. some secure sites also require a specific browser and may not work with Internet Explorer Mobile. This is necessary for browsing the web. and then pressing Center on the 5-way. including those with security and advanced features. Viewing a web page By default. • Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). Internet Explorer Mobile scales web page content to fit your smartphone screen so that you can view most of the information without scrolling left or right. Internet Explorer Mobile supports JavaScript. VBScript. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). such as online shopping. and email.

and then select the web address. press Back (left action key) or Backspace . To refresh the page with the latest content from the Internet. To return to a recently viewed page. but it makes items smaller and arranges the content so that you can see most of it without scrolling horizontally. press (right action key). enter the address of the web page you want to view. so that you don’t have to scroll horizontally. which requires both horizontal and vertical scrolling.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 2 Highlight the address line. select View. and then select one of the following: One Column: Arranges web pages into one column that is as wide as the screen. To exit full screen mode. the lock icon in the address line appears closed instead of open. or tap and hold anywhere on the screen and uncheck Full Screen. 4 Here are some tips on viewing web pages and moving around in them: • To view the previous page. 3 Press Menu (right action key). DID YOU KNOW? Default: Maintains a layout similar to what you see on a desktop computer. and then press Center . If you browse to a secure web page. Show Pictures: Shows or hides pictures on web pages. Desktop: Keeps the same layout and size as on a desktop computer. press • 118 BROWSING THE WEB . Full Screen: Hides the status and navigation areas and fills the entire screen with the web page. Hiding pictures speeds up the time it takes to load pages. select the address line list.

Down . press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Properties. In a list. press Menu and select Tools > Send Link via E-mail. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create the folders • where you want to store your favorites first. or Right to scroll in all directions. To view a web page’s properties. select the list and scroll using Up or Down . press Up or Down to highlight the link. You can also tap the link on the screen with the stylus. • Creating a favorite Favorites let you bookmark a web page so that you can instantly access it without entering the web address. After you create a favorite. press Up . select Zoom. To adjust the size of the text on web pages. and then press Center to go to the selected page. To view each item in a list. press Left or Right to cycle between items. Left . press Up or Down . You need to configure an email application on your smartphone before you can use this feature (see Your email). In Desktop View. In a form. press Center to interact with the form. and then press Center to stop interacting with the form. and then press Center to accept the change. such as a browser search field.YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER Menu (right action key) and select Refresh. To follow a link to another web page. BROWSING THE WEB 119 . TIP • To send a link. • • To scroll through the page in One Column View or Default View. to close Internet Explorer • • • 5 Press OK Mobile. select the address link. press Menu (right action key). Select the email account you want to use to send the link. and then select the size you want. To send email from a web page. you can’t move it to another folder (see Organizing your favorites).

4 Select New Folder. Organizing your favorites You can create folders to organize your favorites. To delete a favorite or folder. Viewing a favorite 1 Press Start Explorer. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Add to Favorites.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 1 Go to the page you want to mark as a favorite. 120 BROWSING THE WEB . press Menu and select Favorites. 2 Press Favorites and select Internet (left action key). and then select Add. 5 Enter a name for this folder. and then select Delete. Select Yes to confirm deletion and press OK. and business links in a third folder. 3 Select the Add/Delete tab. you can store travel links in one folder. 6 Press OK . For example. TIP 1 Press Start Explorer. and select Internet 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Favorites. 3 Select the page you want to view in the list. Select the Add/Delete tab. 4 (Optional) Select the folder where you want to create the favorite. stock links in another. 3 (Optional) Select Name and enter a different description. highlight the item you want to delete. 5 Select Add.

and then select the folder where you want to save the file. and then tap Copy. 3 Go to the application in which you want to paste.com. TIP 1 Go to the page that contains the link to the file you want to download. Copying text from a web page You can select the (Downloads) favorite to access your wireless service provider’s downloads page. 5 Select the Folder list. and then select where you want to store the file: Main memory or Storage card. or tap and hold.YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER Downloading files and images from a web page You can download files that are usable on your smartphone. and then position the cursor where you want to paste the text. BROWSING THE WEB 121 . such as new applications. You can copy text from a web page and paste it in other applications. 7 Press OK . to highlight the You can copy the text from the entire web page. 2 Press Left or Right link to the file. Tap and hold on the page again. 3 Press and hold Center . and then tap Select All Text. MIDI ringtones. 1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy. selecting Favorites. 6 Select the Location list. Tap and hold on the page. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Copy. and then select Save Image to download an image. DID YOU KNOW? DID YOU KNOW? You can access specially formatted streaming content by pressing Menu (right action key). and then select Save As to download a file. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the file. 4 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Paste. or pictures. and then selecting WindowsMedia.

3 Select the web page you want to view. 2 (Optional) Select the Show list in the upper-left. select Use Default. To use the page you were on when you opened the menu. Returning to recently viewed pages The History list stores the addresses of the pages you visited recently. and then select how you want to sort the History list. Encoding: Sets the character set for the web pages you view. set any of the following options: Home Page: Sets the page that appears when you open Internet Explorer Mobile. select Use Current. 2 On the General tab. To select the original home page. Customizing your Internet Explorer Mobile settings 1 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Options.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES TIP If Internet Explorer Mobile does not recognize a phone number as dialable. 122 BROWSING THE WEB . 1 Press Menu (right action key) and select History. you can copy the phone number (as text) and paste it into the phone Dial Pad.

Clear History: Empties the History list. Delete Files: Removes web files that you previously viewed synchronized with your computer. 5 Press OK . Warn when changing to a page that is not secure: Sets whether a message appears when you switch from a secure page to one that is not secure. Warn when page content is blocked due to security settings: Sets whether a message appears when you attempt to open a page that does not meet the security standards associated with your smartphone. Save links to pages visited in the past: Sets how many days of activity the History list stores. The page sends the file and stores it on your smartphone. 4 Select the Security tab and set any of the following options: Allow cookies: Sets whether your smartphone accepts cookies (small files containing info about your identity and preferences). BROWSING THE WEB 123 .YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER 3 Select the Memory tab and set any of the following options: Clear Cookies: Deletes any cookies stored on your smartphone.

Entering basic Bluetooth settings 1 Go to your Today screen. You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your smartphone. as well as to other phones. When communicating with trusted devices. the headset is automatically added to your trusted device list. When you configure a headset (see Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free device). radio interference from nearby electronic equipment. If the battery level is low. or piconets. When you connect to another device. and then tap Bluetooth . If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem. Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology ® in ideal conditions. you can connect to a number of Bluetooth devices such as a headset or hands-free car kit. you can’t make a Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth range is up to 10 meters (30 feet) 124 CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY . you create a partnership (also referred to by terms such as trusted pair. your smartphone skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. handhelds. or pairing) with that device. such as your computer. trusted device. and other factors. ® Check your battery level before establishing a Bluetooth connection. DID YOU KNOW? With the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your trusted device list.

enter CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY 125 . Check this box to allow Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device. 3 Check or uncheck the Make the device discoverable to other devices box. Gray = Bluetooth off. Blue = Bluetooth on. White = Connected to a Bluetooth device. and then select New Partnership. 2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone. 1 Go to your Today screen and tap Bluetooth . Headset = Call in progress with a Bluetooth headset or car kit. Requesting a connection with another Bluetooth device BEFORE YOU BEGIN To prepare your smartphone to be able to accept a connection from a requesting device. 3 Select the Devices tab. Your device remains accessible to other devices until you uncheck the box.YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER 2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? The Bluetooth icon on your Today screen indicates the status of the Bluetooth feature: the basic Bluetooth settings as described in Entering basic Bluetooth settings.

your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. We recommend that where possible. pairing. and then press Next (right action key). enter the same passkey on the other Bluetooth device. 7 If the passkey is not built-in. After you form a partnership with a device. In either case. and then press Finish (right action key). trusted device. Partnership is also known as paired relationship. The longer the passkey. the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. have a predefined passkey. you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other device. 9 Press OK . and 8 If you’re connecting to a headset or hands-free car kit. and then press Finish (right action key). if so.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Partnership Two devices—for example. 6 Enter an alphanumeric passkey between 1 and 16 characters long. you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. KEY TERM then press Next key). check the Hands Free box. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. You can now communicate with this device whenever it is within range and the 126 CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY . 5 Select the device with which you want to connect. and trusted pair. you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. (right action IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices 4 Wait for your smartphone to search for devices and to display the device list. you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again.

To stop the transmission. USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM 127 . Highlight the connection you want to remove. a notification tells you that a transmission is in progress. The maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet). 4 When your smartphone is receiving info. To delete the established partnership with a device. enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in Entering basic Bluetooth settings. Using your device as a wireless modem Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts your smartphone into a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. your smartphone is ready to receive the info. 1 Go to your Today screen and tap Bluetooth . press and hold Center on the 5-way. TIP 3 If you have already set up a partnership with the transmitting device. If you haven’t set up a connection. 2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone. The deleted device can no longer automatically connect with your smartphone. and then select Delete. The range varies greatly depending on environmental factors. press Dismiss (right action key). press Cancel (left action key). To close the notification.YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. Accepting a connection from another Bluetooth device BEFORE YOU BEGIN To prepare your smartphone to be able to accept a connection from a requesting device. Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device. go to the Bluetooth Settings screen and select Devices. check the Make this device discoverable to other devices box to let the device find your smartphone and request a connection.

Your wireless service provider may provide customized software programs that walk you through the DUN setup process. 4 Press Activate (left action key) and follow the wizard to set up Modem Link. you can set up your device as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology. Dial-up networking must be enabled or installed on your computer. go to www. Check 3 Select the Connection list. Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth DUN connection Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth DUN connection • • Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth DUN connection 2 Select Modem Link .7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES You can set up DUN in one of two ways: • • You can use Modem Link (USB). complete the following procedures: • Setting up Modem Link for a USB connection 1 Press Start and select Programs. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN. Create a partnership between your device and your computer as described in Requesting a connection with another Bluetooth device.com/us/support/DUN/. Creating a DUN connection using Bluetooth technology To configure DUN using Bluetooth technology. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. and then select USB.palm. For detailed information on setting up a USB DUN connection. 128 USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM .

3 Double-click the DUN icon. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • 1 Open the Bluetooth screen on your computer and look for the option for paired devices. Check with your system administrator for more information. you can browse the Internet on your computer or download your email. Check with your wireless service provider to see if you need to enter a username and password to make a Bluetooth DUN connection. 4 Enter the following in the Dial field: *99# or *99***1#. 2 Double-click the icon or option representing your smartphone. Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth DUN connection The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on your operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your computer—for example. if it is built in versus if you are using a wireless Bluetooth adapter. NOTE For most wireless service You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate email (see Connecting to a VPN (virtual private network)).YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7 CHAPTER with your wireless service provider to see if such a program is available. check your computer’s documentation for how to set up Bluetooth technology to access the Internet using a DUN connection. Enter the username and password if one is required by your wireless service provider to make a Bluetooth DUN connection. If the following procedure does not work with your computer. Your computer connects to your smartphone and shows that DUN services are available. Check your computer’s documentation for how to open this screen and for the name of the paired devices option. you do not need to enter anything in the User Name or Password field. After the connection is successfully established. • USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM 129 . providers. 5 Click Dial.

and then click Disconnect. To check the status of the connection.7 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 6 You may be asked if you want to remember this dial text for this connection. 7 To verify that you are connected. We recommend that you choose to remember the dial text to avoid errors and the inconvenience of entering it for every session. look for a network connection icon in the taskbar at the bottom of your computer screen. Terminating a DUN Internet session To terminate the DUN connection. right-click the Bluetooth network icon. right-click the icon or option representing your smartphone on your computer. 130 USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM .

or mini-disc player . videos. MP3. Benefits • Never be far from your favorite people. and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone? Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone solves both problems. places. and songs • • Avoid having to use a separate photo viewer. videos. pets. family.CHAP TE R 8 Your photos. too. Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card (sold separately) and then listen through your stereo headphones. because you can play music on your smartphone. and music Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends. and songs Arrange your photos. You can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone— videos. And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player. CD.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Windows Media Player Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . 133 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Or add a picture to a contact (see Adding a contact). CAMERA 133 . Pictures are captured and stored in 16-bit color.YOUR PHOTOS. you can change where pictures are stored (see Customizing your Camera settings). VIDEOS. To add a personal touch to your smartphone. 1. You can change the default setting. pictures are stored in the My Pictures folder on your smartphone. built-in. For information on accessing your pictures on your computer.3-megapixels (1280 x 1024 pixels). and send pictures and videos as attachments or multimedia messages (see Pictures & Videos). JPG format. Taking a picture By default. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER Camera Your smartphone comes with an easy-to-use. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Press Start Videos. You can also move pictures and videos to a computer by synchronizing your smartphone with your computer. If you want to store your pictures on an expansion card. see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer. 2 Select Camera and select Pictures & . You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. or use your videos to create video ringtones. use your pictures as your Today screen background and as caller ID images. You can receive and view pictures and videos. See Customizing your Camera settings for details.3-megapixel camera with 2x digital zoom. Resolution settings range from a low end of QQVGA (120 x 160 pixels) to a high end of 1.

To turn on the still camera. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Mode > Burst. to return to Thumbnail 3 Adjust the position of your smartphone until you see the subject you want to photograph on the screen. the camera goes into standby mode. If the camera goes to standby while the recording is paused. Press any key or tap the screen to return to the image preview. Taking pictures in burst mode Burst mode takes five pictures in quick succession. select Mode. Your smartphone has a self-portrait mirror next to the camera lens on the back of your smartphone. 2 Press Camera and select Pictures & (left action key). 6 Press Center to capture the picture or start the timer. 7 Hold your smartphone still until the picture renders.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. VIDEOS. and then do one of the following: • Press Camera (left action key) to take another picture. Use the mirror when you’re taking a picture and you want to be in the picture. Press OK View. and then select Timer. Resolution: Press Menu (right action key) and select Resolution to change the image quality. 4 (Optional) Adjust any of the following: Zoom: Press Up to zoom in or Down to zoom out. AND MUSIC TIP If you see a camcorder icon below the preview image. 4 Press Center . video mode is on. press Menu and select Still Mode. 5 (Optional) Set a five-second timer: Press Menu (right action key). 1 Press Start Videos. with one button press. • DID YOU KNOW? After three minutes of inactivity when previewing an image. 134 CAMERA . the recording is stopped and the video clip is saved.

TIP If you don’t like a video you recorded. and then press Center . 1 Press Start Videos. For information on accessing your videos on your computer. delete it. Your smartphone has a self-portrait mirror next to the camera lens on the back of your smartphone. If you want to store your videos on an expansion card. see Customizing your Camera settings to change where videos are stored. Press OK to return to Thumbnail View. press Stop (left action key) or Center to stop recording. highlight the video. 4 Adjust the position of your smartphone until you see the subject you want to record on the screen. videos are stored in the My Pictures folder on your smartphone. 2 Select Camera and select Pictures & . provided you have enough storage space available. VIDEOS. Use the mirror when you’re recording a video and you want to be in the video. 7 When you’re finished recording. press Thumbnails (left action key). 8 (Optional) To review the video in Windows Media Player Mobile. 5 (Optional) Adjust any of the following: Resolution: Press Menu and select Quality to change the video resolution. CAMERA 135 . See Deleting a picture or video for details.YOUR PHOTOS. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER Recording a video Videos can be any length. 6 Press Center to start recording. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Video Mode. see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer. By default.

When rotating a picture.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. AND MUSIC Customizing your Camera settings 1 Press Start Videos. and select Pictures & 4 Select the Slide Show tab and set any of the following options: 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. 136 CAMERA . set any of the following options: During slide shows. 3 On the General tab. VIDEOS. ® Use this picture size: Sets the size of pictures you send with the Messaging application. optimize for viewing: Sets whether pictures are optimized for portrait or landscape format during slide shows. Play screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes: Sets whether the pictures in your My Pictures folder are used as a screensaver when your smartphone is connected to your computer and ActiveSync desktop software is not running. rotate 90 degrees: Sets the direction in which pictures rotate.

You can change the resolution setting by pressing Menu (right action key) and selecting Quality. Type filename prefix: Assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured. VIDEOS. Seattle002. Still image compression level: Sets the default size for newly captured still pictures. CAMERA 137 . DID YOU KNOW? Videos are captured and stored in 3GP format. such as Seattle001. Time limit for videos: Limits the length of videos you record. 7 Press OK to return to the Thumbnail View. and so on. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER 5 Select the Camera tab and set any of the following options: 6 Select the Video tab and set any of the following options: Save files to: Specifies whether pictures and videos are stored on your smartphone or on an expansion card. You can select the No limit option. Video resolution ranges from 176 x 144 pixels to 352 x 288 pixels. Include audio when recording video files: Turns the microphone on and off so that you can record videos with or without sound.YOUR PHOTOS.

ASF RTSP Streaming SDP Streaming and select Pictures & JPG PNG BMP GIF and select Pictures & 1 Press Start Videos. WMA. to return to Thumbnail TIP To view pictures or videos in a different folder. select the Show list in the upper-left. 3 Press OK View. The slide show plays automatically. VIDEOS. 138 PICTURES & VIDEOS . you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Viewing a video 2 Select the picture you want to view. Your smartphone supports and streams the following types of video files: • • • • • • MPEG-4 3GPP2 3GPP WMV. you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras or streamed from 1 Press Start Videos. Viewing a slide show In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera. Your smartphone supports the following picture formats: • • • • websites. and then select the album you want to view. 3 Press OK View. 2 Select the video you want to view. see Playing media files on your smartphone.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. to return to Thumbnail 1 Press Start Videos. For more info on viewing videos. and select Pictures & 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Play Slide Show. AND MUSIC Pictures & Videos Viewing a picture In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera.

4 Select the contact to whom you want to assign the ringtone. Reverse . 5 When the Inbox or Messaging application opens. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER 3 Press Center to display the slide show toolbar. and select Pictures & 2 Highlight the picture or video you want to send. Play . and select Pictures & email message or Creating and sending a multimedia message). which you can use to Rotate . You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a lock icon in Thumbnail View. Organizing pictures and videos You can move or copy pictures and videos to other folders or between your smartphone and an expansion card. and Stop the slide show. 3 Press Menu and select Send. 1 Press Start Videos. and select Pictures & 2 Highlight the video you want to use as a ringtone. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Save to Contact Ring Tone. Forward . Pause . VIDEOS. (right action key) 4 Select the email or MMS account you want to use to send the picture or video. 1 Press Start Videos. address and send the message (see Creating and sending an 2 Highlight the picture or video you want to move or copy. 1 Press Start Videos. 3 Do one of the following: • To move the picture or video to another location. Sending a picture or video You can send a picture or video to other picture-enabled mobile smartphone devices or to an email address as an attachment.YOUR PHOTOS. press Menu PICTURES & VIDEOS 139 . Creating a video ringtone You can save a video that you record as a ringtone.

3 Select the Sort By list in the upper-right. Editing a picture For more extensive edits. and select Pictures & and select Pictures & 2 Highlight the picture you want to edit. or size. 1 Press Start Videos. 5 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Paste. (right action key) 4 Do any of the following: To rotate a picture 90 degrees. 1 Press Start Videos. and then select the sort method: Name. press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Copy. select Rotate. Then sync the picture or video back to your smartphone. Using a picture as the Today screen background 1 Press Start Videos. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Set as Today Background. 5 Press OK View. 4 Select the Show list in the upper-left. • To keep the picture or video in two locations.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. 4 Select the Transparency level list and select the appropriate level. You can also view a specific folder or expansion card and arrange the pictures and videos by name. 140 PICTURES & VIDEOS . just download your picture or video to your computer and edit it in your favorite graphics program. VIDEOS. Use a higher percentage for a more transparent picture and a lower percentage for a more opaque picture. or Size. and select the location where you want to place the picture or video. date. AND MUSIC (right action key) and select Edit > Cut. and then select the folder you want to view. and select Pictures & to return to Thumbnail 2 Select the Show list in the upper-left. 3 Press Menu and select Edit. Date. • 2 Highlight the picture you want to use.

press Menu (right action key) and select AutoCorrect. To find all synchronized pictures and videos. To cancel all unsaved edits you made to the picture. and select Pictures & 2 Highlight the picture or video you want to delete. and you can also send them to friends using your desktop email application. press Menu and select Undo. To undo an edit. You can view the pictures and videos. To adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a picture. your pictures and videos are copied to your desktop computer. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete. Tap and drag the stylus to highlight the area to crop. select Revert to Saved. When you synchronize your smartphone. press Menu (right action key) and select Crop.YOUR PHOTOS. Viewing pictures and videos on your computer BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must install • ActiveSync® desktop software from the Windows Getting Started Disc (see Installing the desktop synchronization software) and select the option to synchronize media (see Changing which applications sync). AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER • To crop a picture. VIDEOS. PICTURES & VIDEOS 141 . Tap outside the box to stop cropping. • • Deleting a picture or video 1 Press Start Videos. look in C:\Documents and Settings###BOT_TEXT###lt;Username>\My Documents\Treo My Documents. 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.

WMA WMV MP3 3GP AAC AAC+ MPEG-4 You can also download animated GIF files and view them in Internet Explorer Mobile.5 or later installed on your computer to play videos recorded by your smartphone. Using Sync ensures that the files are transferred correctly. AND MUSIC Windows Media Player Mobile Windows Media Player Mobile can play music. and video files that are stored on your smartphone or on an expansion card (sold separately) in any of the following file formats: • • • • • • • video thumbnail after synchronizing the files. video. Windows Media Player 10 must be installed on your computer 142 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE . and playlist files from your computer to an expansion card or your smartphone. audio. VIDEOS. You can download the videos from an expansion card or you can click the • Be sure you have Windows Media Player 10 or later installed on your computer. You can listen to these music.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. audio. Transferring media files to your smartphone Use the Sync feature in the desktop version of Windows Media Player 10 to transfer digital music. and video files through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or through stereo headphones. DID YOU KNOW? BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: IMPORTANT You must have QuickTime Player version 6. TIP For tips on using the desktop version of Windows Media Player. go to the Help menu in Windows Media Player on your computer. audio.

and then select the library you want to use. • automatically. open Windows Media Player 10. 3 Select the Library list in the upper-left. and select Open File. 4 When the Device Setup Wizard opens on your computer. or artist name). AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER before you install ActiveSync desktop software. and select Windows To sync media files with your computer. transferring media files to an expansion card can take several minutes. VIDEOS. 5 Press Play (left action key). The next time you connect your smartphone to your computer while the desktop version of Windows Media Player 10 is running. TIP 1 On your computer. synchronization starts To play a file that is not in a library. Be patient. 6 Press Menu (right action key) and select any of the following during playback: WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 143 . 6 Select the playlists you want to sync. See the next page for playback controls. album. 7 Click Finish to begin the transfer. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Library. 4 Select the item you want to play (such as a song. 3 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB sync cable.YOUR PHOTOS. update the library (see Working with libraries). Playing media files on your smartphone 1 Press Start Media. set the Media sync option on your smartphone (see Setting synchronization options). If you can’t find a media file on your expansion card. 2 (Optional) Insert a 32MB or larger expansion card into your smartphone. Both Windows Media Player 10 and ActiveSync desktop software are installed from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc that came with your smartphone (see My video and music files won’t sync). click Automatic. go to the Library screen. 5 Check the Customize the playlists that will be synchronized box. press Menu.

turns the sound on or off. TIP or Volume button increases the volume level. Use any of the following onscreen controls during playback: or Center or Center plays the current file.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. your music continues to play in the background. sets the point from which playback begins. press Menu and select Repeat Song. or Volume button decreases the volume level. Select the star to change the rating. Select Connect and add the URL. You can play streaming files from the web. select Programs. displays a video using the full screen. use the Streaming Media application. To play an RTSP or SDP streaming file. 144 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE . A check appears next to this command when it is on. indicates the rating of the current file. VIDEOS. or select History and select a site you’ve visited before. and then select Open URL. Stop: Ends playback. Shuffle/Repeat > Repeat: Plays the Now Playing playlist repeatedly. press Menu on the Library screen. To play an MMS (Microsoft Media Streaming) file. DID YOU KNOW? DID YOU KNOW? To repeat the current song. If you close the Windows Media Player Mobile window. AND MUSIC Library: Displays the Library screen so you can select a different song to play. A check appears next to this command when it is on. displays a website where you can find music and videos to play. pauses the current file. Shuffle/Repeat > Shuffle: Plays the Now Playing playlist in random order. Select URL and enter the website address. and then select Streaming Media. or Left skips to the beginning of the current file or to the previous file. Press Start. Tap and drag the slider to change the current position. or Right skips to the next file.

modify. When you synchronize.YOUR PHOTOS. in the desktop Player. you can create a playlist of upbeat songs for when you exercise and a playlist of soothing songs for a long flight. A temporary playlist. but you must manually update the My Storage Card library. called Now Playing. or clear the files on the Now Playing playlist. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER Working with libraries A library represents each of the storage locations available to Windows Media Player Mobile. WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 145 . Working with playlists A playlist is a list of media files that play in a specific order. highlight the item and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to open the shortcut menu. VIDEOS. Each library contains links to the media files in that location. 4 Wait for the files to be added. 1 Press Start Media. and then select Done. your favorite playlists are automatically copied to your smartphone. and then select Yes to confirm the deletion. Your playlists appear in your libraries (in the My Playlists category). Windows Media Player Mobile usually updates the My Device library automatically. so you should have two libraries: My Device and My Storage Card. as well as any files that are queued up to play next. If you don’t see a media file that you added. appears on the Now Playing menu. manually update the library. You can use playlists to group audio files together or video files together for convenient playback. You can add to. For example. and select Windows 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Library. Select Delete from Library. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Update Library. TIP TIP To delete an item from a library. It lists the currently playing file.

highlight the file. highlight the file. select the Now Playing category. highlight the file. press Menu (right 146 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE . and then select Queue Up. or you won’t be able to see the files in their new location. go to the Playback screen by pressing OK to close the current screen. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. select Add . • • 2 Do any of the following: • DID YOU KNOW? If you move files between your smartphone and an expansion card. To move a file up or down one slot. action key). Customizing Windows Media Player Mobile 1 If necessary. highlight the file and select Properties . 3 On the Playback tab. AND MUSIC 1 Go to the Now Playing screen: • If you are on the Library screen. VIDEOS. be sure to update your libraries. and then select Remove . select Now Playing. If you are on the Playback screen. set any of the following options: TIP You can also move a file in the Now Playing playlist by tapping and dragging it to a new position. press Menu (right action key) and select Clear Now Playing.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. To view more info about a file. To remove all items from the Now Playing playlist. • • To delete a file from the playlist. • To add a file. and then select Move Up or Move Down .

4 Select the Video tab and set any of the following options: Play video in full screen: Sets whether videos automatically play in full screen format. and specifies whether you want the device to detect connection speed. 8 Select the Buttons tab to change any of the available button settings: WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 147 . VIDEOS. Internet Connection Speed: Specifies the speed of your network connection.YOUR PHOTOS. 6 Select the Library tab and set whether you want to see the Library or Playback screen when you open Windows Media Player Mobile. AND MUSIC 8 CHAPTER Scale to fit window: Sets whether videos are automatically scaled to fit the Playback screen. Resume playback after a phone call: Sets whether playback continues after you finish a phone call. Show time as: Sets whether the time remaining or time elapsed appears in the Playback screen. You must select at least one protocol. 7 Select the Skins tab and select Previous or Next to set the player’s background. You can also set a UDP Port. 5 Select the Network tab and set the following options: Protocol: Enables and disables the available protocols. Pause playback while using another program: Sets whether playback continues if you switch to another application.

To unassign an item. highlight the item and select Reset.8 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS. and then press the button you want to use for that item. VIDEOS. select Assign. highlight the item you want to set. • 9 Press OK • To assign a button. AND MUSIC • To restore an item’s factory setting. . 148 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE . highlight the item and select None.

CHAP TE R 9 Your personal information organizer Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those scribbled to-do lists. and your information is kept private when you use the security features available on your smartphone. and more . and past appointments Make to-do lists that get done • • Set reminders for appointments. future. birthdays. You never lose your information. important tasks. All your personal information is backed up each time you synchronize. Also. Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone is all you need to organize your personal information and keep it with you wherever you go. even if your battery is completely drained. Benefits • Track current. you can easily share info with others electronically.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tasks . . . . . . .In this chapter Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 .

and much more. and then select Camera and take a picture. or select an existing picture from Thumbnail View. or other) information. email addresses. TIP Take some time to scroll down through all the fields in a new contact. tap outside the box to accept the information and close the box. home. Be sure to enter mobile numbers and email addresses in the correct fields so that Inbox and Messaging can find this info when you address a message and Calendar can find your contacts when you want to invite them to meetings. 3 Use the 5-way navigator to move between fields as you enter information. To add a caller ID picture that displays when that person calls. TIP Here are some helpful tips for entering info: • 2 Press New (left action key). CONTACTS 151 . phone numbers. • To enter complete name or address (work. select Picture.YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER Contacts Adding a contact 1 Press Start and select Contacts. There are fields for multiple addresses. When finished. tap the arrow on the right side of the line and enter the information in the box that appears.

5 Press OK . 152 CONTACTS . 4 Make changes to the entry as necessary. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete Contact. Press Menu (right action key) and select View By > Company. select Filter. select Categories and then check the categories under which you want this entry to appear. To assign a ringtone to the entry. and then select the category you want to view. highlight the contact you want to delete. 3 Set any of the following options: Show alphabetical index: Displays the alphabet at the top of the Contacts list. Customizing Contacts 1 Go to the Contacts list. select Ring tone and select a tone. 4 To add a note to an entry. press OK . Select a company name to see the contacts who work there. press Menu (right action key). Viewing or changing contact information 1 In the Contacts list (viewed by name). 5 After you enter all the information. Deleting a contact 1 In the Contacts list. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. DID YOU KNOW? • You can find a contact by company name. 3 Press Menu and select Edit.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER • To assign the entry to one or more categories. select the Notes tab. First name Last name First initial and last initial separated by a space Phone number (right action key) • 2 Select the entry you want to open. begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit: • • • TIP To view a particular group of contacts. You can use this index to find a contact.

Day: Shows your daily schedule in day-planner format. See Adding an online address book. Week: Shows your schedule for an entire week. you can also access contact information from your organization’s online address book or Global Address List (GAL).YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER Show contact names only: Enables you to fit more names on the Contacts list by hiding everything but the contact’s name. Finding a contact in an online address book In addition to having contacts on your device. 1 Press Start and select Contacts. • • CALENDAR 153 . past appointments are dimmed. enter the name of the contact. 4 Press OK . select Find Online. Calendar Displaying your calendar 1 Press Start and select Calendar. A morning appointment An afternoon appointment Make sure you are accessing an Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. Month: Shows your schedule for a whole month. Add access to the online address book to your smartphone. Upcoming appointments are bold. you must synchronize with the Exchange Server in order for the Find Online option to appear. After adding the online address book. and then select Find. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: • 3 Select one of the following views: Agenda: Shows your daily schedule in list format. Area code: Specifies the default area code for new contact entries. (right action key) 2 Press Menu and select View. 2 Press Menu (right action key).

or year (based on the current view). 3 Enter a subject (description) and a location. month. 4 Use the 5-way to move to another day. 2 Press Edit (left action key). Adding an alarm reminder to an event 1 Create an event. Don’t confuse the view name displayed above the left action key with the current view. week. and then select it. open the appointment. Creating an appointment 1 Press Start and select Calendar. and then select Remind Me. TIP To “pencil in” an appointment.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Both morning and evening appointments An all-day event Year: Shows a calendar for a six-month period. or weeks before the event you would like to receive the alarm. 4 Select Starts and select the starting date and time. TIP 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select New Appointment. 5 Select Ends and select the ending date and time. 154 CALENDAR . 4 Enter the number of minutes. hours. The left action key displays the name of the next view you see when you press the key. 3 Select Reminder. and then select Tentative. days. 6 Press OK . select Status.

such as a birthday. and then select a repeat pattern. 3 Enter a subject (description). To create a repeat pattern. anniversary. “Submit Final Draft” in the screenshot shown here is an untimed event. DID YOU KNOW? An untimed event can last longer than a day. or vacation. 3 Select Occurs. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select New Appointment. and then select Yes. These events appear as banners at the top of your calendar. For example. does not occur at a particular time of day. Scheduling a repeating appointment 1 Create an appointment or untimed event. and then select it. Creating an untimed event An untimed event. CALENDAR 155 . select Edit pattern and follow the onscreen instructions. they don’t occupy blocks of time. Type of time units Number of time units 5 Press OK . 6 Press OK . 5 Select All Day.YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER 1 Press Start and select Calendar. 2 Press Edit (left action key). 4 Select the starting and ending dates.

You can’t access contact entries without email addresses from your calendar. 156 CALENDAR . BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create contact If you are using an Exchange Server 2003 with Service Pack 2. your calendar is updated as well. 2 Press Edit (left action key). 4 Press OK . 1 Create an event. and then select the name of the contact you want to invite. Select Attendees. entries with email addresses for the people you want to invite to a meeting. select Add and select the names. you can use your corporate Global Address List to find contact information for an attendee. the meeting request is sent to the attendees. Marking an event as sensitive If other people have access to your Microsoft Office Outlook calendar on your computer and you don’t want them to see an appointment. and then select Find Online. press Menu (right action key). and then select it. 3 Select Attendees. 1 Create an event. To invite other attendees. Sending a meeting request You can email meeting invitations to contacts who use Microsoft Office Outlook® or Outlook Mobile. Enter the name of the attendee and select Find. When attendees accept your meeting request. you can mark that appointment as private to hide it from other Microsoft Office Outlook users. and then select it.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER TIP To enter a birthday or an anniversary. create an untimed event that repeats every year. The next time you synchronize. the meeting is automatically added to their schedules. DID YOU KNOW? 4 Press OK . When you receive their response. 2 Press Edit (left action key).

YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER 3 Select Sensitivity. and then select it. Confidential: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. and then check the categories that apply to this event. press Menu (right action key) and select Filter. press New (left action key). and then press OK . To add a new category. 3 Select Category. press Down on the 5-way to scroll to other options. Personal: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. 4 Press OK two more times. other users who can access your folders can’t see your private events. you don’t see the Sensitivity option until you scroll toward the bottom of the entry. If you don’t see an option on the screen. and then select one of the following: Private: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. For example. enter the category name. 2 Press Edit (left action key). Organizing your schedule Use categories to view various types of events. 1 Create an event. they see private events as unavailable time slots. If you sync with Exchange Server. Meeting attendees or recipients see “Please treat this as Private” near the top of an open appointment. when editing an event. Meeting attendees or recipients see “Please treat this as Confidential” near the top of an open appointment. TIP 4 Press OK . 5 After you assign events to categories. CALENDAR 157 . Meeting attendees or recipients see “Please treat this as Personal” near the top of an open appointment.

six. 3 Select the Appointments tab and set any of the following options: Wonder why you’re not seeing all the events in your day? Check to make sure that the filter is set to All Appointments.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 6 Select the type of events you want to view. Deleting an event 1 Highlight the event you want to delete. Customizing Calendar 1 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. set any of the following options: Set reminders for new items: Specifies whether a reminder is automatically added to new events and 158 CALENDAR . 2 On the General tab. or seven days appear in Week View. Show half hour slots: Specifies whether time slots appear in hour or half-hour increments in Day View and Week View. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete Appointment. TIP 1st day of week: Specifies Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week for all Calendar views. Show week numbers: Specifies whether week numbers (1–52) appear in Week View. Week view: Specifies whether five.

TIP Tasks You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of completed tasks. 4 Enter a description of the task in the Subject field. The event has a note attached. The event repeats in a specified pattern. The event has a reminder. The event is marked private. You can also add a task by selecting the Tasks entry bar at the top of the task list screen. A location has been assigned to the event. (left action key). or SMS. MMS. 4 Press OK . The event is a meeting. TASKS 159 . You can override this setting for individual events. Not all icons appear in all Calendar views. . 5 Set any of the following: Send meeting requests via: Specifies the messaging method used to send meeting requests: email. Adding a task 1 Press Start 2 Select Tasks 3 Press New TIP and select Programs.YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER how long before the event the reminder appears. Show icons: Specifies which icons appear next to events.

Starts: Specifies when the task begins. Occurs: Indicates if the task repeats at regular intervals and how often it repeats.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Priority: Specifies the priority level for this task. Sensitivity: Marks this task as Normal. 160 TASKS . Due: Specifies the due date for the task. Notes: Enables you to enter additional text for the task. No Categories. Checking off a task 1 Select the task you want to check off. Personal. Private. or Confidential. Reminder: Sets an alarm for this task and indicates when you want to be reminded. (left action key). 3 Select Status and select Completed. Categories: Assigns the task to one or more categories. press Menu (right action key) and select Filter. 2 Select which tasks you want to view: All Tasks. Later you can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task. Status: Indicates whether the task is now completed. Active Tasks. DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks appear in red. Recently Viewed. TIP You can also mark a task complete by tapping the check box next to the task on the Tasks list. 2 Press Edit 4 Press OK . Organizing your tasks 1 In the Tasks list. 6 Press OK .

Notes Notes are a great way to capture thoughts. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. such as Business or Personal. 4 Press OK . Deleting a task 1 Highlight the task you want to delete. Priority. Creating a note 1 Press Start 2 Select Notes 3 Press New and select Programs. Show Tasks entry bar: Displays the Tasks entry bar at the top of the Tasks list. BEFORE YOU BEGIN To take advantage of all the sync features available in the Notes application. 3 Set any of the following options: Set reminders for new items: Automatically adds a reminder to new tasks. Customizing Tasks 1 Go to the Tasks list. or a specific category. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete Task. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Sort By. questions. install ActiveSync desktop synchronization software from your Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. and meeting notes on your smartphone. (left action key). The default reminder is set to 8:00 on the morning the task is due. Start Date. Subject. or Due Date. . You can override this setting for individual tasks. You can also create a voice note or add a recording to an existing note. 4 Select the sort method: Status. NOTES 161 .YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER Completed Tasks. Show start and due dates: Displays task start and due dates in the Tasks list.

3 To add a voice recording to an existing note. depending on where you recorded the note. Draw a sketch with the stylus. open the note to which you want to add the recording. or hold it close to another sound source. tap the Stop icon. . 7 When you have finished recording. Tap the controls at the bottom of the screen to control playback and volume. TIP 162 NOTES . select the voice note in the Notes list or open the note containing the recording and tap the Recording icon. . To play a recording. 4 If the voice note controls are not visible at the bottom of the screen. A Recording icon appears in the note or note list. press Menu (right action key) and select View Recording Toolbar.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 4 Do one of the following: 5 Tap the Record icon. . Write the text with the stylus. Voice note controls • • • Type the text with the keyboard. crossing at least three ruled lines. 6 Speak into the microphone on your smartphone. You can add several voice notes within a single note. 8 Press OK DID YOU KNOW? 5 Press OK Creating a voice note 1 Press Start 2 Select Notes and select Programs.

move notes to another folder. select the Show list in the upper-left. and then press OK. 3 Set any of the following options: Default mode: Makes the default entry mode either Writing or Typing. 5 Press OK . Select New. 4 Enter the information. and then press OK. To create a new template. 6 Press OK TIP . select Template. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename/Move. go to the Notes list. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete. TIP 3 Select Name. Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename/Move. Select Name. and then select the folder in which you want to store the note. 3 Open the template you want to use. and then select Main memory or Storage Card. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. See Organizing your notes for details. 2 Select the Show list in the upper-left. enter a name for the folder. Customizing Notes 1 Go to the Notes list. 4 Select Folder. NOTES 163 . and then select Templates. 1 Go to the Notes list and highlight a note you want to move. and then select Add/Delete. open the note you want to save as a template.YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9 CHAPTER Creating a note from a template 1 Go to the Notes list. The Organizing your notes You can rename your notes. and then enter a new name for the note. To create a new folder. 6 Rename the note and move it to the appropriate folder. and move notes between your smartphone and an expansion (storage) card. and then enter a name for the template. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Select the Show list. 5 Select Location. Deleting a note 1 Go to the Notes list and highlight the note you want to delete.

you need to assign the Side button to open Notes. TIP To use the Record button action feature. Default template: Specifies the default template for new notes. Record button action: Specifies what happens when you press the Side button to record a voice note while in another application: whether the Notes application opens or whether you stay in the current application. 4 Press OK . you can write notes directly on the screen using the stylus. Save to: Indicates the default location where new notes are stored. 164 NOTES . See Reassigning buttons.9 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER default is Typing. if you change it to Writing.

you can carry. You can also view. Excel. With Microsoft Office. create. and presentations with you . and PowerPoint files on your smartphone • Improve productivity by taking important docs. spreadsheets. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location at any time. and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your smartphone. Benefits • Manage Word. view.CHAP TE R 10 Your Microsoft Office tools Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone enables you to take your office with you—including your Microsoft Office files. and manage PowerPoint files on your smartphone. carry.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . 176 . . . . . . 168 PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Excel Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TIP If Files doesn’t appear under Information Type. go to Start. Make sure the Files box is checked. 4 Do any of the following: • To delete a file from the file sync folder on your computer and from SYNCHRONIZING YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE FILES 167 . navigate to Programs. software are available only when your smartphone is connected to your computer. 3 Under Information Type. double-click Files to view a list of all synchronized files. open the Tools menu and select Options. 2 On your computer.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files You can create and edit Microsoft Office files on your computer or on your smartphone and then synchronize the files so that changes you make show up on both your computer and your smartphone. you must first set Files as one of your synchronization options. and then select Microsoft ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window. To synchronize Microsoft Office files. Synchronizing files 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable. NOTE Most options of ActiveSync desktop TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in the taskbar. see Setting synchronization options. double-click the ActiveSync® icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen to open the ActiveSync desktop software window.

The location of the file sync folder appears in the File Synchronization Settings dialog box • 168 WORD MOBILE . and then select the application that opens the file: Word Mobile . This is a shortcut to the file sync folder. double-click Files. • (under On this computer. do either of the following: • Press Start . On your smartphone. However. select Programs. Excel Mobile . or PowerPoint Mobile . highlight the file name and click Remove. Where are the changes I made to my file? Don't look for the changed file in its original location on your computer. You can also edit Microsoft Office Word documents and templates that you create on your computer. select Programs. Only the synchronized version contains the changes. and then click Open. browse to and highlight the file. • Word Mobile You can create and edit documents and templates and save them as DOC. you can find the synchronized file by doing either of the following: • To copy a file from your computer to your smartphone. double-click the file sync folder icon <<ICON>>. keep in mind that some of the information and formatting may be lost when you save the document on your smartphone. and then select File Explorer . NOTE If you receive an error while synchronizing files. synchronize the files in this folder). and DOT files. RTF . and that version is in the ActiveSync file sync folder. click Add. make sure that all of the files you’re trying to sync are closed on both your computer and on your smartphone.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS your smartphone. Select the Show list in the upper-left corner and select My Device > My Documents. To find this folder. In ActiveSync desktop software. On your computer desktop. TXT. Press Start .

DID YOU KNOW? Revision marks. . endnotes.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER If you have a PDF file (. you need to save it in DOC. You can open PSW files. or DOT format. Remove password protection on your computer before opening the file on your smartphone. WORD MOBILE 169 . you can view the file using Picsel PDF Viewer. Lined page borders are supported. Regular bullets are supported. headers. wavy. if the document is saved. Smart tags.pdf). and then select PDF Viewer. revision marks are lost. Press Start. but they remain in the file so that when you open the file on your computer. • • • The following features are partially supported in Word Mobile: Picture bullets. Lists. but if you edit a file. Underline styles. The following features are not supported in Word Mobile: • • • • • Backgrounds. select Programs. Legacy Pocket Word files. they appear as expected: Fonts and font sizes. Artistic page borders. Metafiles. Unsupported styles are mapped to one of the four supported styles: regular. dotted. Footnotes. Bidirectional text. Table styles. Original fonts are listed on your smartphone and are mapped to the closest font available. Documents appear as though all revisions were accepted. Document protection. and footers. Shapes and text boxes. Some or all of the formatting is lost if the document is saved. Indented lists are mapped to the closest indentation level supported by Word Mobile. The following features are not supported on your smartphone. or thick/bold/ wide. Password-protected files. RTF TXT.

and then enter a name for the template. Finding or replacing text in a document 1 Open the document containing the text you want to find. TIP To create a new template. open the document you want to save as a template. 6 Select the Type list. When you save a new document. Select Name. are retained in the document. . (left action key). . and then select the folder where you want to save the file. and then select the format in which you want to save the file. 5 Press OK to save the file. 2 Select Word Mobile 3 In the document list. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the file. 170 WORD MOBILE . Creating a document from a template 1 Go to the documents list. 3 Open the template you want to use. all page breaks. Select the Show list. 4 Enter the text of the document. 7 Select Save. 5 Select the Folder list. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Find/Replace. 2 Select Word Mobile 2 Select the Show list in the upper-left. and then select Templates. select More Folders to access this folder. TIP To zoom in or out. Opening an existing document 1 Press Start and select Programs. and then select the zoom level. select Template. except a break placed at the end of a document. Press Menu and select Rename/Move. Although not displayed. press View. it is automatically named after the first several words in the file. and then press OK.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Page breaks. select Zoom. select the document you want to open. Creating a document 1 Press Start 3 Press New and select Programs. If you don’t see Templates in the Show list.

3 Select Name and enter a new name for the file. (right action key) Saving a copy of a document NOTE If a document was previously saved on a computer. 5 (Optional) Check the Match whole words only box to find only full words that match the text you entered in step 3. Moving or copying text 1 Open the document containing the text you want to move or copy. 4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in the text you entered step 3. and then select the format in which you want to save the file. WORD MOBILE 171 . 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select File > Save As. any unsupported formatting may be lost when you save the file. press OK . 5 Press Menu and select Paste. 5 Select the Type list. or select Cut to move the text.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER 3 Select Find what and enter the text you want to find. 4 Select the Folder list. 8 When you see a message that the search is done. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Copy to copy the text. or select Replace to replace it. and then select the folder where you want to save the file. To replace all instances of the text. 2 Highlight the text you want to move or copy. 7 Select Next to find the next instance of the text. 6 Select Find to locate the first instance of the text you entered in step 3. or select Replace and enter the replacement text. 1 Open the document you want to copy. 4 Open the document where you want to insert the text and position the insertion point where you want the text to appear. select Replace All.

Font color: Specifies the color. 7 Select Save. Highlight: Indicates whether the text appears with a yellow highlight. 2 Highlight the text you want to format. 4 Set any of the following options for the highlighted text: Font: Specifies the typeface. Underline: Indicates whether the text appears with an underscore.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 6 Select the Location list. Formatting paragraphs and lists 1 Open the document you want to format. • Left: Sets the left margin for the entire paragraph. Size: Specifies the point size. or center of the page. 4 Set any of the following options: Alignment: Aligns the text paragraph with the left. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Format > Paragraph. Right: Sets the right margin for the entire paragraph. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Format > Font. Bold: Indicates whether the text appears normal or thick. 5 Press OK to return to the document. Indentation: Changes the paragraph margins. right. • 172 WORD MOBILE . and then select whether you want to store the file on your smartphone or on an expansion card. Strikethrough: Indicates whether the text appears with a line through it. 2 Position the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format. List: Creates a bulleted or numbered list. Italics: Indicates whether the text appears upright or slanted. Formatting text 1 Open the document you want to format.

TIP • When you go to a folder. and then select Main memory or Storage card. Select Ignore if the word is spelled correctly. • To create a new folder. 7 Press OK TIP Checking spelling in a document 1 Open the document you want to check. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Spelling. Select Add to add a new word to the spelling dictionary. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the document. Organizing your documents You can rename your documents. enter a name for the folder. 2 Highlight a file. select the Show list in the upper-left. Select New. highlight it before you select the Spelling command. and then select the Add/Delete tab. you can easily search your documents by sorting by type. and then select the folder you want to move the document to. To check the spelling of specific text. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename/Move. To indent text in lists. go to the documents list. 6 Select the Location list. 3 If an unknown or misspelled word is encountered. Select the correct word in the list if the word is spelled incorrectly. WORD MOBILE 173 . to return to the document. and then press OK. and move your documents between your smartphone and an expansion card. 5 Select the Folder list. By: Sets the size of the Special indentation. do one of the following: • . move your documents to another folder.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER • Special: Lets you indent the first line or set a hanging indent. you must use the Formatting toolbar. • 5 Press OK TIP You can also use the Formatting toolbar to create a list and to align text. 1 Go to the documents list.

Display in list view: Sets the types of files that appear in the documents list. 174 POWERPOINT MOBILE . animations. 2 Highlight the document you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. you can open and view slide show presentations created on your computer.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Deleting a document 1 Go to the documents list. copy the file into the Mobile Device folder. and URL links are also supported. Customizing Word Mobile 1 Go to the document list. Presentations pause during zooming. Save to: Sets the default location where new documents are stored. • Playing a presentation NOTE If a presentation is set up as a timed slide show. open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. 3 Set any of the following options: Default template: Sets the default template for new documents. 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Delete. Many presentation elements such as slide transitions. the slides advance automatically. and then sync. 4 Press OK . PowerPoint Mobile With PowerPoint Mobile. Microsoft Office PowerPoint features not supported on your smartphone include the following: ® • • • Notes written for slides Rearrangement or editing of slides Files created in PPT format earlier than Microsoft PowerPoint ‘97 HTML files in HTM and MHT formats TIP To copy a file from your computer to your smartphone.

Setting presentation playback options 1 Open the presentation for which you want to change the settings. 4 Select the Playback tab. Select Next or Previous to play animations. 4 Press Center • . Presentations pause during zooming. select Zoom In. • • • POWERPOINT MOBILE 175 . 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Show Options. select the orientation you want. select Default. tap and drag the slide. 3 On the Orientation tab. Press Menu (right action key). Show without slide transition: Turns off transition effects between slides. Press Menu (right action key) and select End Show. Use slide timings. to advance to the next to view the previous 5 Do any of the following: Press Right slide or Left slide.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER 1 Press Start and select Programs. if present: Enables the timings recorded with each slide in a presentation. 2 Select PowerPoint Mobile 3 In the presentation list. If a presentation is set up as a timed slide show. select Go to Slide. and check the Override playback options for all files box. . highlight the presentation you want to play. the slides advance automatically. 5 Set any of the following options: Show without animation: Turns off builds and other animations. select . • Press Menu (right action key). and then select to zoom in or to zoom out. To return to the slide show. and select the slide you want to view. To scroll within the current slide. To select the orientation that best fits your smartphone screen.

2. To turn the presentation into a continuously looping slide show. password protection is removed. Original fonts reappear on your computer. Excel Mobile With Excel Mobile you can create and edit workbooks and templates on your smartphone. Formulas and functions: Unsupported functions are removed. An array or array argument.4}) External link references or an intersection range reference References past row 16384 are replaced with #REF! • • Protection settings: Most protection features are disabled but not removed. 6 Press OK TIP Cell patterns: Patterns applied to cells are removed.3. keep in mind that you may lose some of the information and formatting when you save the workbook on your smartphone. Number formats: Microsoft Office Excel® 97 conditional formatting is displayed in Number format. if present. Formulas containing the following are also converted to values: • . However. check both the Use slide timings. Fonts and font sizes: The original font is listed on your smartphone and mapped to the closest font available. and only the returned value of the function appears. for example. You must remove the password protection in Microsoft Office Excel on your computer 176 EXCEL MOBILE . =SUM({1. and the Loop continuously boxes. You can also edit workbooks and templates that you create on your computer. Note the following formatting considerations: Alignment: Vertical text appears horizontal.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Loop continuously: Advances to the first slide after playing the last slide in a presentation. Borders: Appear as a single line. However.

array formulas. and then press Enter . secondary axes. Scatter. 2 Select Excel Mobile 4 Highlight a cell where you want to enter text or other info. Worksheet names: Names that refer to other workbooks. and logarithmic scales are turned off. AutoFilter Settings: AutoFilters that cause rows to be hidden are supported. (left action key). arrays. Unsupported chart types are changed to one of these supported types: Column. data labels. The zoom setting applies to the entire workbook. 5 Enter the info in the cell. dialog. The following features aren’t supported in Excel Mobile and are removed or modified when you open a workbook on your smartphone: • • • • • • • Hidden. EXCEL MOBILE 177 . Bar. Zoom settings: Worksheet-specific zoom settings are not retained. but you can use the AutoFilter command in Excel Mobile to perform similar functions. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining info. and Area. Pie. Other AutoFilters are removed. Use the Unhide command to display hidden rows. . trend lines. When you save a new workbook. 3D effects. Background colors. shadows. or intersection ranges are removed from the name list. Chart Formatting: All charts are saved as they appear in Excel Mobile. causing those formulas to be resolved as “#NAME?” All hidden names are not hidden. 7 Press OK to save the file. and macro sheets VBA modules Text boxes Drawing objects and pictures Lists Conditional formats and controls Pivot table data (converted to values) Creating a workbook 1 Press Start 3 Press New and select Programs. gridlines. it is automatically named and placed in the workbook list. Line.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER before opening the file on your smartphone.

To return to the normal view. . Highlight the cell at the juncture you 178 EXCEL MOBILE . Zoom: Sets the magnification level so that you can easily read the worksheet. 4 Press View (left action key). 3 Open the template you want to use. Freeze Panes: Locks rows and columns so they remain visible while you scroll. select View > Remove Split. To remove the split bar. and then select Template. select the workbook you want to view. TIP 1 Press Start and select Programs. open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. and then select the folder where you want to save the workbook. Split: Divides the window into two scrollable areas. and then sync. copy the file into the Mobile Device folder. Select Folder. Press Menu and select Rename/Move. 7 Select Save. 5 Select the Folder list. 2 Select the Show list in the upper-left. select Restore in the upper-right. 6 Select the Type list. and then select Templates. and then select any of the following: Full Screen: Shows as much data as possible on the screen. You can also switch worksheets by selecting the sheet list at the bottom of the screen. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the workbook. tap and drag it. Sheet: Lets you switch to a different worksheet. DID YOU KNOW? To create a new template. and then enter a name for the template. open the workbook you want to save as a template. Viewing a workbook TIP To copy a file from your computer to your smartphone.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Creating a workbook from a template 1 Go to the workbook list. Press OK. 2 Select Excel Mobile 3 In the workbook list. and then select the format in which you want to save the workbook. To move the split bar.

3 Select . Select Cell reference or name and enter the target cell info or select Current region. Press Menu and select Insert > Symbol. 2 Enter equals sign ( = ) followed by any values. select View > Unfreeze Panes. place the insertion point where you want the symbol. Entering a formula 1 Highlight the cell where you want to enter the formula. 4 Tap and drag the stylus across the cells you want to add. Highlight the symbol you want to insert. EXCEL MOBILE 179 .YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER want to lock before you select this command. use the Calculator (see Calculator). Toolbar: Indicates whether the toolbar appears onscreen. operators. cell references. and then select Insert. Show: Indicates whether headings and scroll bars appear onscreen. press Menu and select Edit > Go To. • 3 Press Enter TIP Calculating a sum 1 Press View select Toolbar. To unlock the rows or columns. =(B4/25)+100 =Revenue-Expenses . Examples: • To jump to a cell or region. name references. Inserting a function 1 Open the workbook where you want to insert the function. and functions. Status Bar: Indicates whether the status bar appears onscreen. TIP TIP For simple calculations. 5 Press Enter . (left action key) and To insert a symbol. 2 Highlight the cell where you want to insert the sum. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Insert > Function. Select OK.

4 Select the Function list. and then select the type of function you want to insert. and columns 1 Open the workbook you want to add to. rows. 3 Select the Direction list. and then select the specific function you want to insert. Select Autofill as the series type to quickly fill cells with repetitive data such as numbers or repeated text. and then select the direction you want to populate. enter a Step value increment. and then select the type of series you want. Autofill takes the content of the first cell in the highlighted row or column and copies it down or across the rest of the selection. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Fill. 2 Highlight the area where you want to insert elements. Entering a sequence automatically 1 Highlight both the cells containing the info you want to automate and the adjacent destination cells. and then select Series. The highlighted cell and all cells on its right move one column to the right. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Insert > Cells. Adding cells. 6 Select OK.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 4 Select the Fill type list. 5 Select OK. 4 Select how you want to insert the elements: Shift cells right: Inserts a new cell. If you select Date or Number. 180 EXCEL MOBILE . TIP 3 Select the Category list. 5 Select the Series type list.

Enter the name and select Add. Align: Sets whether text wraps within the highlighted cells.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER Shift cells down: Inserts a new cell. press Menu and select Format > Modify Sheets. and style attributes. 5 Press OK TIP To add a new worksheet. 5 Select OK. The entire row in which the highlighted cell is located and all rows below it move down one row. Select Insert. TIP Formatting cells 1 Open the workbook you want to format. The highlighted cell and all cells below it move down one row. 4 Select any of the following: Size: Sets the row height and column width. Font: Sets the typeface. press Menu and select Insert > Define Name. The entire column in which the highlighted cell is located and all columns to its right move one column to the right. 2 Highlight the cells you want to format. color. Press OK. To change the order of the worksheets. Entire column: Inserts a new column. and sets the border and background colors. Entire row: Inserts a new row. select Move Up or Move Down. Number: Sets the type of information the cells contain. Borders: Turns borders on and off for various cell edges. enter a name for the worksheet. and then press OK. and sets horizontal and vertical alignment position. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Format > Cells. highlight a worksheet you want to move. size. and then press OK to finish. EXCEL MOBILE 181 . To name the highlighted cell or range of cells. .

and then select the primary sort column. 3 Select the Sort by list. 4 Select Rename. 4 Check or uncheck the Ascending box to indicate if you want to sort in ascending or descending order.and third-level sorting options. 5 (Optional) Select the Then by lists.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Formatting rows and columns 1 Open the workbook you want to format. Hide: Hides the highlighted rows or columns. and then press OK twice. Unhide: Displays hidden rows or columns in the highlighted area. To automatically fit rows and columns to their contents. 3 Press Menu (right action key). Renaming a worksheet 1 Open the workbook containing the worksheet you want to rename. highlight the worksheet you want to rename. 3 In the Sheets list. enter a new name for the worksheet. 2 Press Menu (right action key)) and select Format > Modify Sheets. and then select second. and then select Format > Row or Format > Column. 2 Highlight the rows or columns you want to format. DID YOU KNOW? You can adjust the column and row size by tapping and dragging the right edge of the column or the bottom edge of the row. 182 EXCEL MOBILE . double-tap the lower edge of the row heading or the right edge of the column heading. 4 Select any of the following: AutoFit: Adjusts the size of the highlighted rows or columns to their contents. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > Sort. Sorting info in a worksheet 1 Highlight the cells you want to sort.

Select the other lists. and then press Next (right action key). • • DID YOU KNOW? You can also create custom filters where you specify comparisons. To turn off filtering. This hides all rows that do not include the selected filter. To display all rows again. 2 Highlight the cells you want to include in the chart. 4 Select the type of chart. 7 Select OK.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER 6 Check or uncheck the Exclude header row from sort box to indicate whether you want to sort the header row. and then select All. 8 Select whether you want the chart to appear as a separate worksheet within the current workbook. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Tools > AutoFilter. press Menu and select Tools > AutoFilter again. or as part of the current worksheet. A list appears at the top of each related column. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Insert > Chart. 6 Select the data layout. and then select Custom. 3 Select one of the new lists. 7 Check the boxes to indicate whether the first row and column represent labels. EXCEL MOBILE 183 . and then press Next (right action key). Filtering info in a worksheet 1 Highlight the cells that contain the info you want to filter. select the filter lists. 9 Press Finish (right action key). 4 (Optional) Do any of the following: • Creating a chart 1 Open the workbook from which you want to create a chart. and then select a filter. and then press Next (right action key). 5 Confirm the area you want the chart to include. Select the filter lists. and then select other filters.

7 Select Next to find the next instance of the info. You can use this setting to convert your chart to a different format. or delete related data points without affecting the info in your worksheet. 6 Select Find to locate the first instance of the info you entered in step 3. To replace all instances of the info. 3 Select Find what and enter the info you want to find. or select Replace to replace it. Series: Lets you add. 5 (Optional) Check the Match whole words only box to find only full words that match any text you entered in step 3. Scale: Specifies the minimum and maximum scales for charts with x and y axes. select Replace All. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Format > Chart. 184 EXCEL MOBILE . and the placement of the legend. 4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in any text you entered in step 3. Finding or replacing info in a workbook 1 Open the workbook containing the info you want to find. format. 4 Select any of the following: Titles: Specifies the title of the chart and headings. 5 Press OK . 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Find/Replace. whether a legend appears. press OK . Type: Specifies the chart style. or select Replace and enter the replacement info. modify.10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS Formatting or changing a chart 1 Open the workbook that contains the chart you want to format. 2 Open the chart. 8 When you see a message that Excel Mobile is done searching.

6 Select the Location list. 1 Go to the workbook list. NOTE Excel Mobile adjusts formulas to . and columns 1 Open the workbook containing the elements you want to delete. Entire column: Deletes the entire column in which the highlighted cells are located. and then select Main memory or Storage card. and moves all columns on their right one column to the left. and moves all rows below it up one row. Deleting cells. 5 Select OK. You can also move them to another folder or move them between your smartphone and an expansion card. rows. However. Entire row: Deletes the entire row in which the highlighted cells are located. Shift cells up: Deletes the highlighted cells and moves all cells below them up one row.YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10 CHAPTER Organizing your workbooks You can rename your workbooks. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename/Move. reflect the new cell locations. 4 Select how you want to remove the elements: Shift cells left: Deletes the highlighted cells and moves all cells on their right one column to the left. 5 Select the Folder list. When you go to a folder. you can easily search your files by sorting by type. 2 Select a file. a formula that refers to a deleted cell displays the #REF! error value. EXCEL MOBILE 185 . 2 Highlight the area you want to delete. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the workbook. and then select the folder you want to move the workbook to. 7 Press OK TIP 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Delete Cells.

Press Menu and select Delete. and then select Delete. Select Yes to confirm. go to the workbook list and highlight the workbook you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. To delete a worksheet. Files to display in list view: Specifies which types of files appear in the workbook list. 3 Set any of the following options: Template for new workbook: Specifies the default template for new workbooks. Select Yes. 186 EXCEL MOBILE . TIP Customizing Excel Mobile 1 Go to the workbook list. press Menu and select Format > Modify Sheets. and then press OK to finish. Save new workbooks to: Specifies where new workbooks are stored. 4 Press OK .10 CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS TIP To delete a workbook. Highlight the worksheet you want to delete.

CHAP TE R 11 Your application and info management tools Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone comes equipped with a variety of tools for managing and organizing your information. you never need to carry a separate calculator. After you use your smartphone to create or capture important business and personal information. and exchange info Always have a calculator with you • • . education. Benefits • • Locate info in any application Install applications. carry. Get the most out of your smartphone: Install some of the thousands of business. And because there’s one on your smartphone. games. and other software • Keep others up-to-date with meaningful business and personal information Store. use one of several options to share the info with others. or leisure-time applications available. Insert expansion cards (sold separately) for a compact and limitless answer to the storage dilemma.

191 Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Finding information . . . . . 194 Sharing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

contacts. You can search by file name or by words located in the item. you can You can also open Search by pressing Option + left Shift. word. and then enter the file name. • • • For information on opening and closing apps. or other info you want to find. 3 Select Search for. FINDING INFORMATION 189 . appointments. Search: Look through the text in all the applications on your smartphone. Global Address List Lookup: Look up names in your online corporate address list. see Opening and closing applications. File Explorer: Browse through the files and folders on your smartphone or on an expansion card. TIP 1 Press Start and select Programs.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER Finding information Quickly find who or what you’re looking for by using one of these search features: • search for words within notes. Using Search Search for files and other items stored in the My Documents folder on your smartphone or on an expansion card. and tasks. 2 Select Search DID YOU KNOW? . See Dialing by contact name for details. Lookup: Find and dial your contacts by name or phone number. For example. DID YOU KNOW? Contacts on your SIM card do not appear in the search results list.

11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS TIP If you’ve looked for an item before. highlight the item. 1 Press Start and select Programs. To quickly delete. and then select the appropriate command. . and then select the sort method. TIP The storage card symbol appears next to the names of files that are stored on an expansion card. select the Search for list. size. 5 Press Search (left action key). Select the Sort by list in the upper-right. select it. rename. or email an item. Exploring files and folders You can use File Explorer to browse the contents of folders on your smartphone or on an expansion card. 2 Select File Explorer 4 Do any of the following: • • 3 Select the folder you want to explore. you can sort them by name. and then select the kind of information you want to find. tap the Show list in the upper-left and select My Device to view all folders. If the folder you want is not displayed. My Device is similar to My Computer on your computer. The root folder on your smartphone is named My Device. press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. date. beam. Show list 4 Select the Type list. To open an item. 6 Use the 5-way to select and view an item from the results of the search. or type. 190 FINDING INFORMATION . and then select the item in the list. DID YOU KNOW? When the items in a folder are displayed.

games. and then select Cut or Copy. you need to use a decompression utility on your computer. To highlight multiple items. compressed. • Applications you download to your computer are likely to be in a compressed format such as ZIP If the file is . For details.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER • To move a file to another folder. You can also install any of the additional software included on the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc as well as other third-party applications that are compatible with Windows Mobile® 5. and more. highlight the item. These files may be required for your smartphone to function properly. to decompress the file before you install the application on your smartphone. These instructions tell you how to install basic files onto your smartphone. you can indicate whether you want to continue the installation. You can install these applications when you install the desktop software. Installing bonus software from the CD The Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc includes several bonus software applications that you can install on your smartphone. tap and drag the stylus. Some software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. Open the destination folder. INSTALLING APPLICATIONS 191 . you see a message indicating that the application is untrusted. Installing applications Your smartphone comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. such as WinZip. or you can install them later. If an application does not have a Microsoft Mobile to Market certificate.0 devices. such as business software. If this occurs. consult the documentation that came with the software. and then select Paste. press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. TIP IMPORTANT Do not delete any files that you cannot identify.

see Third-party applications. Also. If you can try a free version of the software before purchasing it.0 for Pocket PC Phone Edition. Installing third-party applications When installing third-party applications. Install only apps that use Microsoft Windows Mobile 5. The Microsoft Windows Mobile 5. 2 Click Add Programs. 4 Click Install (on the right side of the screen). 6 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your smartphone. For files in any other format except CAB. programs written for earlier versions do not support 5-way navigation or action keys and can have performance problems. 5 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications. you must first download the files to your 192 INSTALLING APPLICATIONS . TIP Before purchasing a third-party application. • NOTE If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error message). contact the application’s vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications.11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 1 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc into the CD drive on your computer. note the following: • • Make sure that the third-party application supports 240x240 screen resolution.0 software for Smartphone is not compatible with your smartphone. you can test it first to make sure it works properly. Installing applications from the Internet You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to install Windows Mobile apps in the CAB file format directly from the Internet. DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party application that lets you run Palm OS® applications on your smartphone. 3 Click the name of the application you want to install. try the free version. Some older applications have screen-size limitations.

1 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. you must first install ActiveSync desktop software on your computer (see Installing the desktop synchronization software). press Start and select Programs. 2 Double-click Mobile Device . Installing applications from your computer BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an application from your computer to your smartphone. 4 Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file. you must first install ActiveSync® desktop software on application from your computer to an expansion card. 2 Press Start Explorer. Installing applications onto an expansion card BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an 3 Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download. 8 Tap the file you downloaded to start the installation program. and select Internet your computer (see Installing the desktop synchronization software). 2 Connect your smartphone to your computer. 1 Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on). and then press Center to start the download process. 4 Connect your smartphone to your computer to synchronize and install the application(s) on your smartphone. 7 Go to the My Documents folder in File Explorer. 6 Select File Explorer . 5 When the download has finished. INSTALLING APPLICATIONS 193 . 3 Copy the application file(s) into the Mobile Device folder. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot (see Inserting and removing expansion cards).YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER computer and then install them to your smartphone by synchronizing.

DID YOU KNOW? Removing applications To free up memory on your smartphone. 3 Highlight the application that you want to remove. you cannot remove the built-in applications that reside in the Read-Only Memory (ROM) portion of your smartphone. 194 REMOVING APPLICATIONS . most convenient way to send 2 Select the System tab. and extensions that you install. so that you can choose the quickest. Built-in applications that cannot be deleted are not listed in the Remove Programs list. 4 Select Remove. and then select Remove Programs . 1 Press Start and select Settings. 5 Double-click My Windows Mobile-Based Device to open the Mobile Device folder.11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 3 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. patches. you can remove applications that you no longer use. 6 Copy the application file(s) into the Storage Card folder inside the Mobile Device folder. 4 Double-click Mobile Device . 5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Sharing information Your smartphone comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information. You can remove only applications.

you can easily share a file by selecting the Menu. The IR port is located on the side of your smartphone closest to the stylus. and other factors.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER your info or to receive info from another device. You can also beam using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone. you can insert a picture or attach a note or other file to an email. The maximum range for beaming with Bluetooth technology is about 30 feet (10 meters). BEAMING INFORMATION 195 . TIP When you have a file open in a program such as Notes or PowerPoint Mobile. • • • • For best results. and then selecting Send via E-Mail or Beam File. near the top. You can also store files on an expansion card and share the expansion card (see Using expansion cards). radio interference from nearby electronic equipment. The normal range for beaming with IR is about 8 inches (20 centimeters). You need to turn IR on before you can beam. By default. In Microsoft Outlook®. shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight. You can synchronize to share info between your smartphone and your computer or between your smartphone and Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 (see Synchronizing information). You can also receive pictures and attachments (see Your email). you can beam files and applications between your smartphone and your neighbor’s device using the IR port or Bluetooth® wireless technology (see Beaming information). the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles. • Beaming information Your smartphone is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that enables you to beam information to another device with an IR port. If you have difficulty beaming. the IR port on your smartphone is turned off. If you are near someone. and both devices kept stationary. Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles.

DID YOU KNOW? 3 Do one of the following: Turning on the IR port 1 Press Start and select Settings. Other Windows Mobile devices are always compatible with your Treo 750 smartphone.11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS The type of information you can beam depends on the type of device you are beaming to. A blue icon indicates a Bluetooth connection. IR: Point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device. and then select Beam . 2 Select the Connections tab. Bluetooth: When the name of the receiving device appears. 3 Check the Receive all incoming beams box. select Tap to send to begin the transfer. Beaming an entry or file 1 Highlight the entry or file you want to beam. A red icon indicates an IR connection. 2 Press Menu (right action key) and select Beam… (the menu item changes names based on the type of item you highlighted). 196 BEAMING INFORMATION .

and then select Beam. Make sure the Receive all incoming beams box is checked. 2 Point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the transmitting device. select Yes to receive the beam. If you can’t receive beamed info. try a soft reset (see Resetting your smartphone). If you still can’t receive info.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER 4 Wait for Done to appear next to the name of the receiving device before you continue using your smartphone. 3 Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you feel it lock into place and you hear the confirmation tone. Select the Connections tab. Using expansion cards The expansion card slot on your smartphone enables you to add miniSD cards to extend the storage capacity of USING EXPANSION CARDS 197 . 2 Hold your smartphone with the screen facing you and hold the card with the label facing you. 3 When the Receiving Data message appears. The notch on the card should be toward the bottom of your smartphone. Inserting and removing expansion cards 1 Open the expansion card slot door by sliding your fingernail or another thin object into the notch. TIP your smartphone. press Start and select Settings. you need to connect a card reader (sold separately) to your computer. TIP We recommend that you purchase preformatted expansion cards. Receiving beamed information 1 Turn on your screen. To format a card on your own. miniSD expansion cards can store the following: • • • • Pictures Videos MP3 audio files Email attachments • • • Games Applications Databases Expansion cards are sold separately. For example.

press in and release the card.11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Notch 4 To remove an expansion card. remove the card from the slot. 198 USING EXPANSION CARDS . 5 After you feel the expansion card slot eject the card.

(Some applications may not support this feature. look on the other tabs (if present). when you create new Word Mobile documents. and audio files.) 1 Insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot. you can save them directly to an expansion card. 2 Press Start and select Programs. 3 Select File Explorer 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER Opening applications on an expansion card After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot. If you still can’t find a Save to list. 4 Select the Save to list. the application may not support this feature. 5 Press OK . Show list If you don’t see the Save to list on the Options screen. For example. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. notes. Saving files to an expansion card You can save space on your smartphone by saving files to an expansion card. TIP To run an application on an expansion card. Saving files to an expansion card also makes it easy to share those files with others. your smartphone must have enough free space in the internal memory to run the application. 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Options. and then select Storage Card. and then select Storage Card. pictures. . videos. you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card. TIP 5 Select the application you want to open. 2 Open the application from which you want to save the info. USING EXPANSION CARDS 199 . Excel Mobile workbooks.

and then select where you want to move the info: Storage Card or Main Memory. 4 Select the Storage Card tab. TIP Your applications are usually located in the My Device/Program Files folder. 7 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Paste. 5 Press OK . 200 USING EXPANSION CARDS . 3 Go to the list view and select the file or application you want to move (see Exploring files and folders).11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Moving info between your smartphone and an expansion card 1 Insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Press Start and select Settings. Copying or moving applications and files between your smartphone and an expansion card 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 6 Press OK . 6 Go to the folder where you want to place the selected item. 2 Press Start and select Programs. 4 Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename/Move. 2 Open the application from which you want to move the info. Viewing available expansion card memory 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 3 Select File Explorer Exploring files on an expansion card 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 8 Press OK . 2 Press Start and select Programs. 4 Select the file or application you want to copy or move (see Exploring files and folders). . 3 Select the System tab. and then select Memory . 5 Select the Location list. 5 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.

See the instructions that came with your card for details. make sure the card is not write-protected. multiplication. Calculator You can use Calculator for basic arithmetic calculations. 6 Press Menu (right action key) and select Rename. 5 Select the folder or files you want to view. Renaming an expansion card If you change the contents of an expansion card. or renaming the card itself. 8 Press OK . 2 Select Calculator 3 Select File Explorer 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left. you may at some point want to rename the card to better match its contents.YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11 CHAPTER 3 Select File Explorer . and division. CALCULATOR 201 . 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left. such as addition. Performing calculations 1 Press Start and select Programs. and then select Storage Card. . 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 7 Enter a new name for the card. 2 Press Start and select Programs. subtraction. and then select My Device. TIP Before copying information to or renaming the files or folders on an expansion card. 6 Press OK . 5 Highlight the current expansion card name (Storage Card by default). .

To display the number stored in memory. TIP Using the Calculator memory • To store a number. Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit. DID YOU KNOW? When you store a number in memory. select . select . Calculates percentage. See Excel Mobile for details. An M appears in the box. Calculates the square root of a number. Clears the current calculation or the displayed number.11 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 3 Enter numbers and perform calculations. TIP 202 CALCULATOR . Switches a number between negative and positive. • • You can paste numbers into Calculator as well as copy calculation results to be pasted into another app. To clear the memory. For more advanced calculations. it replaces the number that is currently stored. select . use Excel Mobile. including the following: Clears the last digit in a multi-digit entry. select the box to the left of the entry box. Calculates the reciprocal of a number. • To add the displayed number to the number stored in memory.

CHAP TE R 12 Your personal settings Customizing is optional. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone call by locking the keyboard. fonts. Take advantage of various levels of security. Some preference settings can help extend the life of your battery. and more on your smartphone. But why not personalize your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you? You can easily customize the sounds. Benefits • • Conserve power Secure your data • Make your screen easy to read . There are lots of ways to make your smartphone work better for you. screen colors.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 System settings . . . . . . . . . . 210 Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In this chapter Today screen settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 System sound settings. . . . 219 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Check the boxes next to the items you want to appear on your Today screen. 5 (Optional) Highlight an item and select Options (if available) to configure the settings for the item. check the Use this picture as the background box. 6 Press OK DID YOU KNOW? . and uncheck any items you want to hide. Press OK to return to Today Settings. TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS 205 . select a new theme from the Appearance tab in Today Settings (see Changing the system color scheme). 5 Select the picture you want to use. 2 On the Personal tab. 2 On the Personal tab. . select Today . To change the color theme for your smartphone.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER Today screen settings Selecting your Today screen background 1 Press Start and select Settings. There are lots of third-party plug-ins available for your Today screen. 6 Press OK TIP . select Today 3 Select the Items tab. Selecting which items appear on your Today screen 1 Press Start and select Settings. 4 Select Browse. 3 On the Appearance tab.

at the movies. If it’s set to Sound Off. slide the Ringer switch to Sound On . System sound settings When you’re in a meeting. or anywhere that silence is required. 2 Select Analog or Digital. When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On position. Sound On Sound Off TIP Can't get music to play out of the built-in MP3 player? Check the Ringer switch. including Calendar notifications and system sounds. 2 To hear all sounds again. DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. When you move the Ringer switch back to Sound On.12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Changing the clock format You can change the format of the clock on the Today screen from digital to analog and back. the smartphone ring volume is still set to the loudest setting. you can immediately silence all sounds on your smartphone. you do not hear the smartphone ring. 206 SYSTEM SOUND SETTINGS . if the smartphone ring volume is set to the loudest setting and you slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off. Silencing sounds 1 Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off . The smartphone vibrates briefly. a clock icon appears displaying the time. you won’t be able to hear music. 1 Tap and hold the clock display with the stylus. This does not mute the speaker during phone calls. If you select analog format. For example. it restores the previous sound settings.

SYSTEM SOUND SETTINGS 207 . select Sounds & Notifications . To play a sound. and sets the volume level when this sound is turned on. highlight it. 3 On the Sounds tab. 2 On the Personal tab. 4 Select the Notifications tab and set any of the following options: Programs: Turns sounds on/off in the applications on your smartphone. The remaining options vary based on the action you select. press Menu. and send sounds. TIP To record.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER Selecting Sounds & Notifications 1 Press Start and select Settings. set any of the following options: Events: Turns sounds on/off for system warnings and error messages. Screen taps: Turns sounds associated with tapping the screen on/off. To delete a sound. highlight it and press Backspace. press Menu and select New Sound. and sets the volume level when this sound is turned on. preview. select the Manage tab. Hardware buttons: Turns sounds associated with pressing buttons on/off. Event: Specifies the action for which you want to change the settings. select it and press Play. delete. and select Send Sound. To send a sound. Notifications: Turns alarms and reminders on/off in the applications on your smartphone. To record a sound.

12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Display and appearance settings Adjusting the brightness 1 Press Option 2 Press Left brightness. 208 DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS . and then press . 6 To smooth the edges of screen fonts. check the Enable Clear Type box. Play sound: Lets you turn the sound on/off for the selected event. to adjust the Changing the text size and clarity 1 Press Start and select Settings. select Play Sound. 5 Press OK . if turned on. Repeat: Indicates whether the sound plays more than once. To preview the sound. and then select Screen . 7 Press OK . 2 Select the System tab. 4 Press Left text size. and Right to adjust the 5 Select the Clear Type tab. and Right . Vibrate: Indicates whether your smartphone vibrates to notify you about the selected event. Display message on screen: Indicates whether a notification message appears onscreen for the selected event. To select a different sound select the list to the right of this setting. and then select Play. and then select a different sound. 3 Select the Text Size tab. 3 Press OK .

S. You know your screen needs adjustment when the wrong feature is activated when you tap the screen. list separators. align the screen. To fix the problem. negative number sign symbol and format. leading zero display. The region selection sets the default format settings. U. Time: Sets the time style. and then select Regional Settings . select a region from the list.). and then select Screen . Currency: Sets the currency symbol and position. and AM and PM symbols. and long date style.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER Setting display formats 1 Press Start and select Settings. DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS 209 . your screen may need to be readjusted. select Align Screen. Date: Sets the short date style. the decimal symbol and position. Aligning the screen to correct tapping problems Occasionally. 2 Select the System tab. 1 Press Start and select Settings. 5 Press OK . separators. and negative number format. 5 Press OK . 3 On the Region tab. 4 Tap the screen where indicated. digit grouping symbol and group size. 2 Select the System tab. separators. 3 On the General tab. 4 (Optional) Select any of the following tabs to customize the format settings: Number: Sets the decimal symbol and number of decimal places. the digit grouping symbol and group size. and measurement system (metric vs.

2 Select the System tab. and then select Screen . . You can still access the remaining applications by selecting Programs from the Start menu. select a theme in the list. 4 Select an orientation: • • • Portrait Landscape (right-handed) Landscape (left-handed) .12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Changing the system color scheme You can also set the background for your Today screen (see Selecting your Today screen background). 1 Press Start and select Settings. 1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 On the Personal tab. 2 On the Personal tab. TIP Application settings Arranging the Start menu You can change the first seven applications listed on the Start menu. 4 Press OK . 3 Check the boxes next to the applications you want to see in the Start menu. 1 Press Start and select Settings. 3 Select the General tab. select Today 3 On the Appearance tab. 4 Press OK . 5 Press OK 210 APPLICATION SETTINGS . select Menus . and then selecting the application’s icon. Changing screen orientation Landscape orientations are determined by which hand you would hold the stylus in.

1 Press Start and select Settings. • • • = Calendar. 4 Select the Assign a program list.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER TIP Don’t forget the six icons across the top of the Start menu. Option Option + Start + OK Reassigning buttons Buttons Settings lets you select which applications are associated with many of the buttons and key combinations on your smartphone. 5 Press OK . hardware buttons are mapped to the following items: • • • Start OK = Start menu. The APPLICATION SETTINGS 211 . and then select the application you want to assign to the button or key combination you selected in step 3. select Buttons . and German. They’re the apps you opened most recently. Voice commands enable you to use speech to execute some commands on the Start menu and the Programs screen. Setting up voice commands IMPORTANT The Voice Command application is available only for English. and it’s easy to get back to them: just use the 5-way to select one of the icons. Hold Side = Windows Media Player. = Option + Phone/Send Messaging. 3 On the Program Buttons tab. highlight the button or key combination you want to change in the Button list. 2 On the Personal tab. 1 Assign the Hold Side button to Voice Command. See Reassigning buttons for details. French. = OK/Close. = Task Manager.

For example: • 4 Select Enabled. a microphone icon appears at the top of your screen.12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 2 Press Start and select Settings. in your car until you read the End user notice about this kind of usage. After ” Voice Command finishes speaking. After Voice ” Command finishes speaking. and then press and release the assigned Voice Command button (see Setting up voice commands). “General” to access general Help topics. For example. say. 1 Set the Ringer switch at the top of your smartphone to Sound On. ” To access your music. To access Help. Using voice commands DID YOU KNOW? If you have questions about the types of commands that can be used with Voice Command. To access your Calendar. Say your answer. “Start Calendar. say. select Options to choose the features you want enabled for the highlighted item. a • • 212 APPLICATION SETTINGS .“Help. IMPORTANT Do not use voice commands 3 On the Personal tab. select Voice Command. “Start Windows Media. say. If an item is highlighted and the Options button is active. 3 In a clear voice say the command. 2 Hold your device about nine inches (230mm) away from your mouth. see End user notice. say. A tone plays and a microphone icon appears at the top of your screen. 5 Select the items you want to enable. you can go to the on-device Help by pressing Start and selecting Help.

2 On the Personal tab. Setting input options 1 Press Start and select Settings. . Say your answer. select Input 3 Select the Word Completion tab and set any of the following options: Replace text as you type: Indicates whether the text you type adds to existing text or replaces it. You can also specify how many letters you want to enter before a suggestion appears.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER microphone icon appears at the top of your screen. This is similar to the Insert function on a computer keyboard. you can press the Voice Command button before it completes the question. you may say your answer. TIP To enter a suggested word. TIP You can move quickly through voice commands by stopping the voice command response before it finishes. and then press Center to accept it. 4 Select the Options tab and set any of the following options: Suggest words when entering text: Indicates whether word suggestions APPLICATION SETTINGS 213 . After the microphone icon is visible. and whether a space appears after you insert a suggested word. how many suggestions you want to see. appear as you enter text. When Voice Command responds. press Down to highlight the suggestion.

Capitalize first letter of sentence: Specifies whether the first letter of a sentence automatically appears in uppercase. Default zoom level for writing: Specifies the initial size of text entered from onscreen writing methods. Phone Lock: receive calls. Locking your smartphone and info Your smartphone includes several features that help you protect your smartphone from inadvertent use and keep your information private. without requiring you to press a Shift key. 214 LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO . Keyguard: Manually disables all buttons and the screen’s touch-sensitive feature to prevent accidental presses in your briefcase or pocket. such as dialing your national emergency number (such as 911 or 112). Scroll upon reaching the last line: Specifies whether the display automatically scrolls when you select the last line of visible info. Auto-Keyguard and touchscreen lockout: Automatically enables Keyguard after a period of inactivity and lets you disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active call. The built-in security software lets you use your smartphone for emergency calls.12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 5 Press OK . even if it is locked. Requires a PIN to make and Voice recording format: Specifies the format in which you save voice notes. Default zoom level for typing: Specifies the initial size of text entered using the keyboard.

1 Press Start and select Settings. you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls. press Option and Power/End . If you’re using a headset or hands-free device and your smartphone is in a pocket or bag. LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO 215 . you must use the 5-way navigator to access items on the screen. press Center To manually turn on Keyguard when your smartphone screen is on. Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) By default. . TIP Turning on Auto-Keyguard Auto-Keyguard enables you configure the Keyguard feature. Locking your screen 1 Press Start and select Settings. you can manually turn on Keyguard during a call to prevent accidental key presses. your keyboard locks so that you don’t accidentally press buttons or activate screen items while your smartphone is in a pocket or bag. select Keyguard . 2 On the Personal tab. To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your smartphone up to your ear to speak. 4 Press OK TIP . When the screen’s touch-sensitive feature is disabled.YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER System password lock: Requires a password to see any information on your smartphone. 3 Select the Auto-Keyguard list and then disable the Auto-Keyguard feature or set the period of inactivity that passes before the keyboard automatically locks. select Keyguard . • • To dismiss Keyguard. 2 On the Personal tab.

12
CHAPTER

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

3 Check or uncheck the Disable touchscreen box to determine whether the screen’s touch-sensitive feature is enabled during a call. 4 Press OK .

1 Press Start

and select Settings. .

2 On the Personal tab, select Phone 3 Select the Security tab.

Locking the SIM card You can lock your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card to prevent unauthorized use of your mobile account. When your SIM card is locked, you must enter the PIN to power on your phone to make or receive calls, except for emergency numbers. The SIM card remains locked even if you move the card to another phone. When your SIM card is locked, you can unlock your SIM card by trying to turn on the phone. A dial pad appears for you to enter your PIN.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need the

4 Check the Require PIN when phone is used box. 5 Enter the PIN and press Done (left action key). 6 Press OK . 7 Turn your phone off to activate the phone lock feature. Your SIM card locks when you turn off your phone and turn it back on. When your SIM card is locked, you can unlock your SIM card by entering your PIN.

following:

Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). Get your default PIN from your wireless service provider

216

LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

12
CHAPTER

You can permanently unlock your SIM card. Press Menu and select Preferences > Phone Settings. Select the Security tab and uncheck the Require PIN when phone is used box.
DID YOU KNOW?

NOTE You need your PIN number to edit

your PIN number or remove the locking feature. If you enter an incorrect PIN more times than allowed by your wireless service provider, the SIM card locks. After the SIM card locks, you need the PUK (PIN Unlock Key) to unlock the SIM card. Contact your wireless service provider for more information and the PUK. Locking your smartphone To protect your personal information, you can lock the system so that you need to enter your password to access any of your information or use other features of your smartphone.
IMPORTANT If you lock your system, you

between your chances to enter the password. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your smartphone. Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your smartphone. However, you can restore all previously synchronized info the next time you sync (see Synchronizing information). 1 Press Start and select Settings. .

2 On the Personal tab, select Lock 3 On the Password tab, check the Prompt if device unused for box to turn on the password feature.

4 Select the first list, and then select how long a period of inactivity must pass before you are prompted to enter a password to unlock the system. 5 Select the Password type list, and then select a format for your password. 6 Select Password, tap the onscreen keyboard icon, and enter your password. Then tap the onscreen keyboard icon again.

must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you enter an incorrect password, you are given another chance. Each time an incorrect password is entered, you are given progressively longer time periods

LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO

217

12
CHAPTER

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

7 Select Confirm, tap the onscreen keyboard icon, and enter the password again. Then tap the onscreen keyboard icon again. 8 (Optional) Select the Hint tab and enter a hint to help you recall your password. 9 Press OK
TIP

1 Press Start

and select Settings.

2 On the Personal tab, select Owner Information . 3 On the Identification tab, enter any of the contact information you want to include.

.

If you lock your smartphone and use a PIN as the password, you can dial an emergency number by entering the number in the password field and pressing Send. You do not need to press Option before entering the number. However, if you select Strong alphanumeric as the password type, you must first press Option twice before entering the number in the password field. See Locking your smartphone.

Entering owner information You can enter personal information that you want to associate with your smartphone, such as your name, company name, and phone number. You can also set whether you want this information to appear when you turn on your smartphone. If you lose your smartphone, this feature can help the person who finds it return it to you.

4 Select the Notes tab and enter any additional text you want to include. 5 Select the Options tab and check the boxes to indicate which info (if any) you want to appear on the screen when you turn on your smartphone. 6 Press OK .

218

LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

12
CHAPTER

You can also display your Owner Information on your Today screen. See Selecting which items appear on your Today screen for details.
TIP

System settings
Setting the date and time Clock & Alarms Settings lets you set the time zone, time, and date for your home location and a location that you visit. To set the display format for the date and time, see Setting display formats. 1 Press Start and select Settings. 4 Select the first list, and then select the time zone for your home location. 5 Select the hour, and then press Up or Down to increase or decrease the hour setting. Repeat this process for the minute, seconds, and AM/PM settings. 6 (Optional) Select Visiting and set the info for a location that you visit often. 7 Press OK . 8 If prompted, select Yes to accept your changes. Synchronizing the date, time, and time zone with the network By default your smartphone synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with your wireless service provider’s network

2 Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms . 3 On the Time tab, select Home.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

219

12
CHAPTER

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

whenever your phone is on and you are inside a coverage area. 1 Press Start and select Settings.

2 Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms . 3 Select the More tab. 4 To disable this option, uncheck the Enable local network time box. 5 If you want to keep your smartphone date and time set for your selected location, uncheck the Use network time zone box. Setting system alarms System alarms let you set alarms that are not associated with a task or appointment. For example, you can use your smartphone as an alarm clock when you travel, or set alarms to remind you when it’s time to take medication or pick up the kids. 1 Press Start and select Settings. 4 Check a box to turn on that alarm. 5 Select the description next to the box you checked and enter a description for the alarm. 6 Select the days of the week you want the alarm to go off. You can select multiple days for each alarm. 7 Select the time you want the alarm to go off, and then press OK . 8 Select the alarm icon, check the boxes to select how you want the alarm to go off, and then press OK .
TIP To change the alarm sound, select the alarm sound icon, select the Play Sound list, and then select the alarm sound you want to use.

2 Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms . 3 Select the Alarms tab.

220

SYSTEM SETTINGS

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

12
CHAPTER

9 Press OK

.
TIP

10 If prompted, select Yes to accept your changes. Managing identity certificates Your smartphone may include preinstalled certificates. Certificates are digital documents that are used to authenticate and exchange information on networks. Certificates can be issued for a user, a device, or a service. 1 Press Start and select Settings.

To delete a certificate, tap and hold the certificate in the list, and then select Delete from the shortcut menu.

Enabling error reporting Error Reporting sends info that helps diagnose application errors for devices running Windows Mobile software. When an error is detected, a text file is created. You can review the file and choose whether you want it delivered to Microsoft technical support. The information is used by programming groups at Microsoft for quality control and is not used for tracking individual users or installations for any marketing purpose. The info that is collected is technical info about the state of your system when the error occurred. No documents (or any info contained in them) are intentionally sent with the report. To ensure further security, the report is transmitted via a secure connection and is kept confidential and anonymous in a limited-access database.

2 Select the System tab, and then select Certificates . 3 Select any of the following: Personal: Displays certificates that establish your identity when you log in to a secured network, such as a corporate network. Root: Displays certificates that identify the computers, such as servers, to which you connect. These certificates help prevent unauthorized users from accessing your smartphone and information. 4 Press OK .

SYSTEM SETTINGS

221

visit the Federal Trade Commission website at www. 4 Press OK . highlight it and select Activate.12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS This error reporting method meets the privacy regulations of the European Union (EU) as well as the Fair Information Practice Principles of the Federal Trade Commission in the United States. Your smartphone must be connected to your computer when you send the error report—provided your computer is connected to the Internet. To close an application. DID YOU KNOW? Storage Card: Displays the amount of memory available on an expansion card that is inserted in the expansion slot on your smartphone. as well as the amount of memory in use versus the available memory. How much storage space do I have left? 1 Press and hold OK . To close all open applications.gov/reports/privacy3/fairinfo. To view the Fair Information Practice Principles. select Stop All. 2 Select the System tab.htm. 2 Select any of the following tabs: Main: Displays the amount of memory assigned to your applications and info. 222 SYSTEM SETTINGS . 3 Select whether you want to enable or disable error reporting.ftc. To switch to an application. and then select Error Reporting . Running Programs: Lists the applications that are in use on your smartphone. 1 Press Start and select Settings. highlight it and select Stop.

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12 CHAPTER TIP An easy way to check the battery level is by tapping the Battery icon in the title bar. and then select Backlight. adjust the display backlight setting. set whether the display backlight turns off automatically after a period of inactivity. 3 Press OK . 2 Select the System tab. SYSTEM SETTINGS 223 . Optimizing power settings 1 Press Start and select Settings. Press Start and select Settings. and then select Power . To conserve additional battery power. Select the System tab. You can assign different intervals for battery power and external power. 5 Press OK TIP . view the power remaining in your battery. 3 On the Battery tab. On the Battery Power tab. 4 Select the Advanced tab and set whether your smartphone screen turns off automatically after a specified period of inactivity.

1 Press Start You can also turn wireless services on and off by tapping the signal-strength icon at the top of the screen. 2 Select the Connections tab. ISP server phone number or access point Username Password and select Settings. 224 CONNECTION SETTINGS . you can set up another connection. Connection settings Managing ISP settings Your smartphone is already set up to connect to the Internet using a high-speed data connection on your wireless service provider’s network. 2 Turn the wireless features on your smartphone on/off. press Menu (right action key) and select Wireless Manager. For special situations. press Menu and select the wireless feature you want to change. such as connecting to your internet service provider (ISP) or to a remote access server (RAS). • • 3 Press OK . To connect to the Internet. TIP BEFORE YOU BEGIN Obtain the following information from your ISP or system administrator: • To change the settings for one of the displayed wireless features.12 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Turning wireless services on/off 1 From the Today screen. simply start Internet Explorer Mobile. Select All to turn all wireless features on/off. and then selecting Wireless Manager. and then select Connections .

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

12
CHAPTER

3 On the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections. 4 Select the Modem tab. 5 Highlight the connection you want to view or change, and then select Edit, or to create a new connection, select New. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to edit or create the connection. Connecting to a VPN (virtual private network) If you want to use your smartphone to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a VPN. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall (security layer).
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network. If you need a VPN, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN client to use this feature.

Ask your corporate system administrator for the following information:
• • • •

Your username and password Your server’s domain name Your server’s TCP/IP settings Your server’s host name or IP address

1 Install your third-party VPN client (see Installing applications). 2 Press Start and select Settings. 3 Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections . 4 On the Tasks tab, select Add a new VPN server connection. 5 Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.
TIP

To manually start a data connection on your wireless service provider’s network or another network, go to Connections Settings, and on the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections. Tap and hold the connection you want to start, and then select Connect from the shortcut menu.

CONNECTION SETTINGS

225

12
CHAPTER

YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Setting up a proxy server 1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections 3 On the Tasks tab, select Set up my proxy server. 4 Check both boxes near the top of the screen. 5 Select Proxy server and enter the proxy server name. 6 Press OK
TIP

Ending a data connection If your service plan includes minutes-of-use fees for data connections, you can reduce costs by ending the data connection when you’ve finished browsing the web. 1 Use the stylus to tap one of the data connection icons ( or ) on the title bar. 2 Select Disconnect from the shortcut menu.

.

To change settings such as the port number, proxy server type, or credentials, select Advanced.

226

CONNECTION SETTINGS

CHAP TE R

13

Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional information and answers to other common questions, visit www.palm.com/ treo750-support.

In this chapter
Transferring info from another device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Reinstalling the desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Making room on your smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

COMMON QUESTIONS

13
CHAPTER

Transferring info from Reinstalling the another device desktop software
For information on transferring your info from a previous Windows Mobile® device or from a Palm OS device to your new Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone, visit www.palm.com/treo750-support for instructions.
®

If you have problems synchronizing using ActiveSync desktop software, you may need to reinstall the software.
®

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your

DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party application that lets you run Palm OS® applications on your smartphone.

computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator. 1 Shut down your computer, and then turn it on again. 2 On your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. 3 Remove Microsoft ActiveSync if it is on your computer. 4 Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications. 5 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc into your computer’s CD drive and follow the onscreen instructions.

If you have questions about Windows Mobile, you can go to the Microsoft Windows Mobile website. Search for Palm devices or Pocket PCs for information.
DID YOU KNOW?

IMPORTANT Do not use a backup utility to

transfer your info from another device to your new smartphone. This can cause your smartphone to malfunction.

TRANSFERRING INFO FROM ANOTHER DEVICE

229

13
CHAPTER

COMMON QUESTIONS

You must install the version of ActiveSync desktop software that came with your smartphone on the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. Other versions may not work with this smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? The Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc installs the software and drivers that let you synchronize with Microsoft Office Outlook®. If you want to synchronize with a different personal information manager (PIM), you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is available for your smartphone.

1 If your smartphone responds to key presses, press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. 2 If the screen display is on, press Power/End to turn off the screen. 3 Open the expansion card slot door on the side of your smartphone. 4 Use the stylus tip to gently press the reset button next to the expansion card slot.

Resetting your smartphone
Performing a soft reset Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your smartphone is not responding or you have trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help.

5 Wait for the progress bar on the Treo logo screen to fill before continuing to use your smartphone.

230

RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE

you may lose info in these applications and you need to reinstall the application on your smartphone after the hard reset. IMPORTANT Synchronize to restore your Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. and tasks. RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE 231 . A hard reset can tell you whether a problem stems from your smartphone or from an application installed on it. See Third-party applications for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues. as well as programs you have added. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset. DID YOU KNOW? When you synchronize after a hard reset.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER TIP You can also do a soft reset by removing the battery and reinserting it. Never do a hard reset without first trying a soft reset. Calendar. contacts. 2 Open the expansion card slot door on the side of your smartphone. such as appointments. Make sure it’s an application that’s approved by Palm. and Tasks. You can restore previously synchronized information the next time you sync. Please contact the developer to find out if your info is backed up during synchronization. Notes. TIP DID YOU KNOW? If the phone or the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature was on before a reset. 1 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer so that your smartphone applications and info can be restored by synchronizing again after you perform the hard rest. such as Outlook email. Outlook data. Contacts. Performing a hard reset A hard reset erases all personal information. You can use a backup and restore solution. If you do a hard reset. such as third-party software on your smartphone. these automatically turn on after the reset. the problem may be related to software you installed. such as the one included on the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. the source folder in My Documents changes from Treo My Documents to WM_your name.

com/environment for more information. 7 Wait for the progress bar on the Treo logo screen to fill before continuing to use your smartphone. 1 Press Power/End screen. pressing it into place. and lift the battery at a 45-degree angle. 5 Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle. to turn off the 2 Use one hand to press the Battery door release and use the other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone. Visit www. you may also need to restore a backup to recover additional info and settings. press Power/End to wake up the screen. 6 Press Up to confirm the hard reset. Do not use a battery from any earlier model of smartphone. 5 Continue pressing and holding both buttons until the “Erase all data?” prompt appears. DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone stores all your info even when you remove the battery. TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery in an evironmentally responsible and legal way. 3 Place a finger in the notch between the stylus and the battery. use the tip of the stylus to gently press and hold the reset button next to the expansion card slot. Slide the battery door onto the 232 RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE . Replacing the battery Your smartphone comes with a replaceable battery.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS 3 If the screen is off. In some areas. If you use a backup utility. 4 While pressing and holding Power/End . 4 Align the battery contacts with the phone contacts inside the battery compartment. 8 (Optional) Synchronize to restore your previously synchronized info. Be sure to use a replacement battery from Palm that is compatible with Treo 750 models. disposal in household or business trash is prohibited.palm.

COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER back of the smartphone until it clicks into place. follow these steps to turn off the Voice Command setting. 2 Select Personal. 3 Uncheck the Enabled box. 4 Press OK . Battery contacts Phone contacts 5 Press OK . Notch 6 Wait for the screen to turn on. try doing a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). PERFORMANCE 233 . If the problem persists. Battery door release 2 Select System. and then select Memory . and then select Voice Command . If the previous steps don’t fix the problem. 3 Select Running Programs. Performance The applications are running slower than usual 1 Press Start and select Settings. if it is enabled: 1 Press Start and select Settings. 4 Select Stop All to close all your open applications.

try adjusting the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness). the screen automatically turns off. perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). see Maximizing battery life). Screen The screen appears blank 1 If you’re on a call. connect your smartphone to the AC charger (see Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again. you can test it first to make sure it works properly. the screen dims.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS TIP Be sure that third-party applications are compatible with Windows Mobile version 5 or later. Also make sure to install only apps that use Microsoft Windows Mobile 5. Press any key except Power/End to wake up the screen. If you can try a free version of the software before purchasing it. Applications written for earlier versions can have performance problems. one minute later. make sure that the application supports 240x240 screen resolution. check with your email provider or system administrator to make sure that the server is set up properly to work with your smartphone. 234 SCREEN . 3 If that doesn’t work. 2 Look closely at the screen. perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). If you can see a dim image. 5 If that doesn’t work.0 for Pocket PC Phone Edition. Pressing Power/ End hangs up the call. TIP If you are using a third-party application. For more tips on conversing battery life. Some older applications have screen-size limits. 4 If that doesn’t work. when the time period specified in Backlight Settings expires. Incorrect server setup can cause excessive drain on your battery. My battery seems to drain quickly If you have a push email solution (such as GoodLink™ wireless messaging) or if you have set up a schedule for wireless synchronization.

My phone seems to turn off by itself If a system error and reset occur. 2 If you’re in a building. However. and play so you know when to expect signal strength issues. 4 On the General tab. Network connection Signal strength is weak 1 If you’re standing. TIP Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live. 5 Tap the screen where indicated. if your smartphone can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset. the phone automatically turns on if it was on before the reset. 4 If you’re outdoors. it does not automatically turn on the phone (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). move near a window. 6 Press OK . trees. 3 Select the System tab. move about 10 feet (3 meters) in any direction. My smartphone won’t connect to the mobile network 1 Try the suggestions above for weak signals. NETWORK CONNECTION 235 . Open any metal blinds. 5 If you’re in a vehicle.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER The screen doesn’t respond accurately to taps or activates wrong features 1 Make sure there is no debris trapped under the edges of the screen. move away from large buildings. 2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). work. or electrical wires. select Align Screen. 3 If you’re in a building. and then select Screen . move your smartphone so that it’s level with a window. 3 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 2 Press Start and select Settings. commute. move outdoors or to a more open area.

To connect to the Internet. You can make and receive calls and transmit data simultaneously.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS I can’t tell if data services are available The following icons appear in the title bar to indicate whether data services are available: You are in an area that supports UMTS or HSDPA services. • Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your subscription plan includes data services and that these 236 NETWORK CONNECTION . You can still make or receive calls. Your phone is on and a GPRS (EDGE if available) data connection is active.8 Kbps. HSDPA (High-Speed Downlink Packet Access) An evolutionary enhancement to UMTS packet data. but the data transmission is automatically interrupted. Your phone is connected to a GPRS (EDGE if available) network. KEY TERM KEY TERM My smartphone won’t connect to the Internet Your smartphone supports GPRS or UMTS/ HSDPA wireless data networks. Your smartphone supports data rates up to 1. with rates up to 384 Kbps. EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution) A wireless technology that can provide fast data transfer and Internet access with rates up to 236. but you are not actively transmitting data. Your phone is connected to a UMTS or HSDPA network.8Mbps. You can still make or receive calls. as well as voice and multimedia services. You can still make or receive calls. but you are not actively transmitting data. you must subscribe to data services with your wireless service provider. KEY TERM UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) A third-generation (3G) wireless technology that is designed for high-speed data transfer. Your phone is on and a UMTS or HSDPA data connection is active. HSDPA uses different modulation and coding techniques to improve downlink performance.

3 On the Tasks tab. contact your wireless service provider for assistance.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER services have been correctly activated. Your Bluetooth device is charged and turned on. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). Your wireless service provider should also be able to tell you if there are any outages in your location. I can’t send or receive text or multimedia messages • I can’t make or receive calls using a hands-free device with Bluetooth® wireless technology Verify all of the following: • The Turn on Bluetooth box is checked in Bluetooth Settings. Bluetooth range is up to 10 meters (30 feet) in optimum • Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off). perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). select Manage existing connections. • • Press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. and make sure the receiving device can handle the type of message you’re sending. that these services have been correctly activated. Confirm that data services are correctly configured on your smartphone by doing the following: • • • Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes messaging services. and then select Connections . 4 If your wireless service provider’s name appears in the list. 2 Select the Connections tab. If a text message arrives but does not display a notification. press OK . Your smartphone is within range of the hands-free device. • NETWORK CONNECTION 237 . • 1 Press Start and select Settings. then press and hold the same button to turn it back on. and that they are available at your location. contact the recipient or sender of the message. If not. If possible.

and then select Bluetooth. and other factors. To delete the partnership: 1 Press Start Settings. • • 8 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. If this is impossible. 4 Select your headset name from the list. • 2 Select the Connections tab. and then select Set as Hands-Free. radio interference from nearby electronic equipment. move the phone closer to the hands-free device. . If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise erase 238 SYNCHRONIZATION . 6 Select Save. 5 Create a new partnership (see Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology. and then select 2 Select the Connections tab. 7 Highlight the headset name. and then select Bluetooth. and then select Delete. delete the existing partnership and create a new one. which include the absence of the following: obstacles. .13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS environmental conditions. 3 Highlight the headset device name. I lost the connection between my smartphone and my Bluetooth headset 1 Press Start Settings. microwaves.4 GHz radio frequency. and Wi-Fi equipment. 4 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. 5 In Partnership Settings. 3 Select the Devices tab. Synchronization Synchronization enables you to back up the information on your smartphone onto your computer or your server. If the headset still doesn’t work. such as cordless phones. The device specifications are compatible with your smartphone. make sure the Hands Free option box is checked. and then select The Bluetooth Settings screen is closed. 9 Test your headset by making or receiving a call. You are away from other devices using the 2.

using the ActiveSync desktop synchronization software from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc that came with your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? A common cause of sync problems is the presence of protective software.windowsmobile. and then select ActiveSync. select Programs. 1 Verify that the USB sync cable is securely connected at all points (see Setting up your computer for synchronization). If the synchronization is successful. synchronize frequently. direct wireless synchronization with an Exchange Server. and that USB is selected from the list. See Exchange ActiveSync (wireless synchronization) for help with SYNCHRONIZATION 239 . do the following: Smartphone: Press Start . such as VPNs or firewalls. you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore the info. and then select Connections. Select Menu (right action key). ActiveSync desktop software does not respond to sync attempt As you complete the following steps. on your computer or network. or you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer. you do not need to complete the remaining steps. You can synchronize email and other information directly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 with Service Pack 2 using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. synchronize after each step. 2 Look for the ActiveSync icon at the top of your smartphone screen and the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on your computer to make sure ActiveSync desktop software is running on your computer. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your info.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER all your information on your smartphone. Make sure the Synchronize all PCs using this connection box is checked. ActiveSync desktop software This section covers issues with synchronizing using ActiveSync desktop software. If one or both icons if not displayed. DID YOU KNOW? You can go to the Windows Mobile website for more information at www.com.

microsoft. synchronizing with ActiveSync may not work. 8 Uninstall the desktop software that came with your smartphone. and then insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. Click File. 5 Restart your computer and make sure ActiveSync desktop software is running. When the Synchronization Setup Wizard appears. From the File menu. 3 Double-click the ActiveSync icon in your taskbar. select Connection Settings. which came with your smartphone. 9 Delete the existing partnership between your smartphone and your computer and create a new one by doing the following: • Disconnect your smartphone and your computer from the sync cable. Right-click the gray ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. click Yes.com and search for the 240 SYNCHRONIZATION . Go to www. • • • • 10 If your organization uses a firewall or a VPN connection. follow the steps to establish a sync relationship between your smartphone and your computer. When asked to confirm. try connecting the sync cable to a different USB port or directly to your computer’s built-in USB port. and repeat the installation process (see Reinstalling the desktop software). and then click Delete Mobile Device. 6 If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub. and then select Open Microsoft ActiveSync. 7 If you’re already synchronizing through a built-in USB port on the front of your computer. and then click Connect. 4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). and then select Microsoft ActiveSync.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS Computer: Click Start. move the sync cable to a USB on the back of your computer if your computer has USB ports in both places. Connect your smartphone and your computer to the sync cable. navigate to Programs. Make sure the Allow USB connections box is checked.

For more information. you must copy the 1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). Notes. Contacts. Tasks. If you’re trying to sync offline. SYNCHRONIZATION 241 . your smartphone can synchronize with the root folders of Contacts. try the following: • • • • • • • 11 Verify with your computer hardware vendor that your operating system supports your internal USB controller. If you want to synchronize with a global Exchange Address Book. be sure to set your Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar. consult the company that makes the PIM. Calendar. and make sure the necessary synchronization settings are set to synchronize the files. and Tasks to be available offline. and Notes. If you’re still having problems.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER following topics to help with specific firewall setup situations: • ActiveSync USB Connection Troubleshooting Guide ActiveSync with Sygate Personal Firewall ActiveSync with TrendMicro PC-cillin Internet Security ActiveSync with Norton Personal Firewall ActiveSync with Zone Alarm Security Suite ActiveSync with McAfee Personal Firewall ActiveSync with Windows Firewall • • addresses to your local Contacts list in Microsoft Office Outlook (right-click the addresses and select Add to Personal Address Book). Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t appear where it should • With the included software. you need to install third-party software to synchronize. You may want to use a third-party solution instead. The Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc lets you synchronize with Microsoft Office Outlook for Windows. 2 Open ActiveSync desktop software on your computer. If you use a different PIM. Microsoft Office Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software.

If roaming charges are not a concern. If you’re not sure whether this software is installed.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS 3 Uninstall ActiveSync desktop software. 4 Synchronize your phone and your computer. 2 Open Microsoft Office Outlook and correct the wrong entries. a scheduled sync does not work while you are roaming. Synchronization starts but doesn’t finish Make sure that you installed the desktop software that came with your smartphone. follow these steps to continue your sync schedule while roaming: 242 SYNCHRONIZATION . which came with your smartphone (see Reinstalling the desktop software). My scheduled sync doesn’t work By default. This is to prevent roaming charges on your account. My video and music files won’t sync 1 Make sure you have Windows Media Player 10 installed on your computer. reinstall it (see Reinstalling the desktop software). reboot your computer. reinstall it (see Reinstalling the desktop software). My appointments show up in the wrong time slot after I sync 1 Make sure that you installed the desktop software that came with your smartphone. Media file synchronization fails if you installed ActiveSync desktop software before you installed Windows Media Player 10. 2 Reinstall ActiveSync desktop software from the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. which came with your smartphone. You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem. 3 Manually enter any information you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized. If you’re not sure whether this software is installed. and repeat the installation process (see Reinstalling the desktop software). and then insert the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc.

Try again later. An alert tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem on the server There is a temporary problem with the server or the server may be temporarily overloaded. be aware that items causing this type of error are skipped and do not show up again. so they can’t be restored after a hard reset. 5 Press OK .COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER 1 Press Start and select Programs. see Making room on your smartphone for suggestions on other ways to free up space on your smartphone. An alert tells me that there is not enough free memory to sync my info ActiveSync ran out of storage space. contact your system administrator. If you use a backup utility. Try the following: 1 Go to Memory Settings and close all running programs (see Closing applications). . 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Schedule. If you sync again to see if the error persists. SYNCHRONIZATION 243 . An alert tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem with [item type] [item name] An error occurred during the sync of a single item. and if the problem persists. you may be able to restore a backup to recover your Today screen setting and other additional info. 4 Check the Use above setting when roaming box. See ActiveSync desktop software for help with synchronizing using ActiveSync desktop software. This error can usually be corrected only by removing the item that caused the error. Exchange ActiveSync (wireless synchronization) This section covers issues with direct wireless synchronization with an Exchange Server. 2 If the problem persists. My Today screen settings are not restored after a hard reset Settings such as the background image and plug-in choices are not backed up during synchronization.

and try again later. An alert tells me that my account information could not be detected When you set up the Exchange Server sync options. Check your Exchange Server name and proxy server settings (see Setting up wireless synchronization). The connection may have been lost. be sure to use your provider’s network as the connection type for the account. Correct the credentials (see Setting up wireless synchronization). If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems in using the account. and try to sync again. Some email service providers have other requirements specific to their • • 244 EMAIL . An alert tells me the device timed out while waiting for credentials The Exchange Server credentials screen was left open too long. check with your system administrator to find out if a systemwide locking policy is in place.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS TIP If you are synchronizing with an Exchange Server and you’re unable to change your lock settings. or set up your smartphone to sync only with a computer. Re-enter the Exchange Server credentials. the credentials page was left blank. or the server may have encountered an internal error. Some email service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. and try to sync again. verify that the account complies with your email provider’s requirements by following these steps: • Verify both your password and your username for your email account. the server may be temporarily overloaded. Email I have problems using my account Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If this is the case. An alert tells me that the server could not be reached Your smartphone had to wait too long to connect to the Exchange Server.

Some providers do not offer this option at all. Check the synchronization schedule to make sure that email sync is set to occur at the expected day and time. Press Start . check with your service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed. Yahoo! requires you to set up POP mail forwarding for your Yahoo! account to download email messages to your smartphone. Scheduled email synchronization is not working If email synchronization is occurring and you turn your smartphone off or the I have problems sending email If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them. Press Menu (right action key) and select Configure Server. other providers require an upgrade for accessing email on a smartphone. Press Menu (right action key) and • EMAIL 245 . • Service provider settings frequently change. • connection to your email service provider is disconnected. in turn: • Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a smartphone. For example.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER service. select Programs. See Setting the synchronization schedule for details. the synchronization fails. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist. try these steps. Press Start . and then select ActiveSync . If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time. • I have problems sending and receiving email Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. and then select ActiveSync . If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems. check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly. Make sure the verify password setting is on. This is required for over-the-air synchronization. select Programs.

and then select Settings. In this case. 3 Select Internet Options. Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. . 5 Click OK. require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers. 2 Select Control Panel. When I sync with my Exchange Server my info is not downloading to my smartphone Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system. Many ISPs. you must send it through another server (see Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application). such as cable companies. the email client software must be properly set up. 4 Make sure the SSL box is checked. Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS select Configure Server. If you cannot obtain the name of this server (some companies do not give it out. • 4 Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software. you cannot use Exchange ActiveSync to synchronize with the Exchange Server. Follow these steps to check the settings: 1 Click Start on your computer. My vCard or vCal email attachment isn’t forwarding correctly Microsoft Office Outlook provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer. Make sure the SSL box is checked. but if you want to send email. because they do not want wireless access to their servers). You can also check the following setting: 1 Press Start and select Programs. 246 EMAIL . For these features to work correctly. 6 Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Configure Server. and then click the Programs tab. you can almost always receive email from these accounts.

palm. WEB 247 . WML script.com/support.palm. An image or map is too small on my smartphone screen Internet Explorer Mobile has several viewing modes: One Column. if you enter the address http://www. and other plug-ins. the page may contain elements that are not supported by Internet Explorer Mobile. Some websites use a redirector to their true home page.com/us/ support. Please contact the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using Internet Explorer Mobile. such as Flash. If you’re still having trouble. TIP Your smartphone can open your email application when you select an email address on a web page. press Menu (right action key) and select Refresh. it may resolve to http://www.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER Web I can’t access a web page First. make sure you have Internet access: Open Internet Explorer Mobile and try to view a web page you’ve loaded before. Switch to Desktop to see the full-size image (see Viewing a web page). To ensure that you’re viewing the page directly from the Internet. Desktop. Shockwave. For example. VBScript. try to view the page in question again. A secure site refuses to permit a transaction Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. and enter that address in Internet Explorer Mobile. After confirming your Internet connection. and Full Screen. If Internet Explorer Mobile can’t follow the redirect. If it comes up blank. If nothing happens when you select the link. press Menu (right action key) and select Refresh. try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector. try setting up your email application first. Default.

Resolution settings range from the low end of VGA (160 x 120 pixels) to a high end of 1. Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. lint-free cloth.13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS Camera DID YOU KNOW? Pictures are 16-bit color.3 megapixels (1280 x 1024). Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall). • For best results. • • • 248 CAMERA . Make sure the subject is at least 0. Low-light images may be grainy. due to the sensitivity of the camera. lighting the subject’s face. your Camera images are stored in the C:\Documents and Settings###BOT_TEXT###lt;Username>\My Documents\Treo My Documents folder on your hard drive (see Camera). Keep the subject of the pictures still. verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you. This can affect the Camera Preview Mode. Delete third-party applications one by one until the preview image improves.5 meters (18 inches) away from the camera to ensure good focus. You can change the resolution setting by pressing Menu (right action key) and selecting Resolution (still images) or Quality (video). • Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera: • Remember that when you synchronize. The Camera preview image looks strange Some third-party applications overwrite the color settings on your smartphone with their own 8-bit color settings. Hold the camera as still as possible. Clean the camera’s lens with a soft. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels. Video resolution settings range from a low end of 176 x 144 pixels to a high end of 352 x 288 pixels. so you may see a blur.

8 If the problem is resolved. 3 Delete the most recently installed application from your smartphone (see Removing applications). try the following: 1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). Use caution when installing the following types of applications: • • • • version 5. 6 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER Third-party applications Sometimes third-party applications can cause conflicts on your smartphone. perform another soft reset. 5 If possible. 2 Make sure the third-party application is compatible with the Windows Mobile THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS 249 . Getting more help Contact the vendor of any third-party software if you require further assistance. 4 If the problem persists. synchronize or use a backup utility to back up your most recent info. Ringtone managers Caller ID applications Instant messaging Applications that modify when your phone or data connections turn on or off and how your phone behaves If you recently installed an application and your smartphone seems to be stuck.2 operating system on your smartphone. 9 If the problem recurs. 7 Synchronize or restore your backup to restore the info in your built-in applications. Third-party applications that modify wireless features may affect the performance of your smartphone and may require extra troubleshooting. begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time.

or install many third-party applications. Move images to an expansion card or delete images from your smartphone (see Pictures & Videos). you may want to clear all recent pages (see Customizing your Internet Explorer Mobile settings). • Internet: If you save links to pages you’ve visited in Internet Explorer Mobile. Making room on your smartphone If you store a large number of records. Move multimedia content and attachments to an expansion card. You may also want to empty the deleted items folder. or delete large files Also. remember that your smartphone includes an expansion card slot. from your smartphone (see Deleting a single message).13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS TIP Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Treo 750 smartphone keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind. you still need free memory on the smartphone itself to run applications from an expansion card. You may encounter strange behavior or errors in these applications if you use the keyboard and the 5-way navigator. However. Messaging: Multimedia content and email attachments can consume excessive memory. and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards. Here are some common ways to clear space on your smartphone: • • Camera: Large images or videos take up a lot of memory. the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications or move them to an expansion card (see Copying or moving applications and files between your smartphone and an expansion card). • 250 MAKING ROOM ON YOUR SMARTPHONE .

try turning the smartphone “face down” (screen facing the surface). Keep your hand away from the microphone hole. Position the smartphone closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone. close to your mouth. which is on the lower-right side of your smartphone. Try decreasing the volume on your smartphone to avoid coupling or feedback on the other person’s end. Are you hearing your own voice echo? Ask the other person to turn down their volume or to hold the smartphone closer to their ear. Check the signal strength indicator. If you’re using Speakerphone mode with your smartphone lying on a flat • • VOICE QUALITY 251 . If the signal is weak. or the hands-free microphone. Is your voice too quiet on the other end? Be sure to hold the bottom of the smartphone. try to find an area with better coverage. This applies to both the speakerphone and to the handset earpiece.COMMON QUESTIONS 13 CHAPTER Voice quality Is the other person hearing an echo? • surface.

13 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS 252 VOICE QUALITY .

and you can open it any time. and support information. and then select Quick Tour . While using your smartphone • up-to-date downloads. Press Start . contact your wireless service provider’s customer care. It is already installed on your smartphone. Online support from Palm: For For a quick introduction • Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone’s features. go to www.Where to learn more • To view the on-device guide. Customer service from your wireless service provider: For questions about your mobile account or features. select Programs. ® • On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is included on your smartphone.com/treo750-support. The on-device guide is specially formatted for your smartphone screen.palm. If you need more information • Books: Many books on Windows Mobile devices are available in local or online book retailers (look in the computers section). WHERE TO LEARN MORE 253 . press Start and select Help. troubleshooting.

254 WHERE TO LEARN MORE .

See Installing the desktop synchronization software. double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. such as Microsoft Outlook®. that helps you manage your personal information and keep it synchronized with your smartphone. See Optimizing power settings. See Beaming information.bluetooth. To open ActiveSync on your computer. Bluetooth® wireless technology Technology that enables devices such as smartphones. If the icon does not appear. and then press a key on the keyboard to view the alternative characters available for that key. click Start. The wireless features on your smartphone are unaffected by this setting. desktop software A Personal Information Manager (PIM) application for computers. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology. For more info.Terms ActiveSync® The technology that exchanges and updates the information on your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone with the information on your computer. Alt (alternative) The key that you use to enter accented characters and symbols that do not appear on your keyboard. and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances. mobile phones. See Installing the desktop synchronization software. auto-off interval The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your smartphone turns off.com. Press Alt . See Entering other symbols and accented characters. click All Programs (or navigate to the Programs group). visit www. and then select Microsoft ActiveSync. TERMS 255 . beam The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared port on your smartphone or using Bluetooth® wireless technology.

See Setting up wireless synchronization. infrared (IR) A way of transmitting information using light waves. MMS (Multimedia Messaging System) An enhanced messaging system that enables you to send pictures. and tasks wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) The rechargeable battery technology used in your smartphone. Your smartphone supports data rates up to 1. calendar events. (Additional charges may apply. (Additional charges may apply.) See What are all those icons? HSDPA (High-Speed Download Packet Access) An evolutionary enhancement to UMTS packet data.) See What are all those icons? GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) A mobile Internet connectivity technology that allows persistent data connections. contacts. with rates up to 236. Mobile Device The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install applications and other information on your 256 TERMS .dialog box A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task. animations. See Creating and sending a multimedia message. HSDPA uses different modulation and coding techniques to improve downlink performance. EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to 3 times faster than standard GPRS connections. Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® Technology that allows your smartphone to synchronize email. See Beaming information.8Mbps.8 Kbps. See Charging the battery. and ringtones almost instantly. You use the IR port on your smartphone to transfer information between other IR devices within a short radius.

slave devices which the master device can bring into active status at any time.smartphone. however. TERMS 257 . pairing. and you cannot make calls except those to emergency numbers. and ACT!. and memos. PIM (personal information manager) A genre of software that includes applications such as Microsoft Outlook. and symbols. this indicates that your smartphone is not connected to any network. Phone/Send The button on your smartphone that provides quick access to your Today screen and dials after you’ve entered a phone number. The devices recognize each other because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology. See Entering numbers. tasks. Lotus Notes. Partnership is also known as paired relationship. See Making calls from the Today screen. go to the Wireless Manager. To access it. To turn the phone on/ off. you no longer need to enter the passkey. partnership The connection that you make between two devices by means of Bluetooth wireless technology. You can still use the organizer features. See Turning your phone on. open Windows Explorer or My Computer and look for the Mobile Device entry. or parked. schedules. punctuation. PIMs generally store contacts. The network can include up to 255 inactive. piconet An ad-hoc network of devices that uses Bluetooth wireless technology to connect one master device with up to seven active slave devices. After you create a partnership between the devices. and trusted pair on some devices. trusted device. Palm® Desktop software. Option Press this key and then a second key to enter the character or to access the feature displayed above the letter on the second key. Phone Off Appearing on the Today screen. See Installing applications from your computer.

See Locking the SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN more than the allowed number of times. streaming Technology that enables you to access media content—for example. See Viewing a video. watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download a file to save on your smartphone. that contains your mobile account information. your SIM is blocked and you must call your wireless service provider for the PUK. Start The menu on your smartphone from which you can open all applications. PIN2 (personal identification number 2) A code that protects certain network settings such as fixed dialing. PUK (PIN unlock key) A special extended password assigned to your SIM card. See Synchronizing information. 258 TERMS . See Creating and sending a text message. See Opening applications. SMS (Short Messaging Service) The service that exchanges short text messages almost instantly between mobile devices. Your smartphone can send and receive text messages while you are on a call. See Locking the SIM card. Addresses and phone numbers and SMS messages can also be stored on the SIM card. See Inserting the SIM card and battery. inserted into your smartphone. such as your phone number and the services to which you subscribe. See also PUK. SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card The smartcard. your computer. Turning on the PIN lock secures your wireless account.PIN (personal identification number) The password assigned to your SIM card by your wireless service provider. or a server is automatically updated in one of the other locations either wirelessly or by means of a cable connection. synchronization The process in which information that is entered or updated on your smartphone.

0 software for Smartphone is not compatible with your Treo 750 smartphone. as well as voice and multimedia services. The Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 for Pocket PC Phone Edition. If you only synchronize wirelessly using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. See Installing the desktop synchronization software. See Installing third-party applications. TERMS 259 . be sure to install only apps that use Microsoft Windows Mobile 5. See What are all those icons? username The name associated with your smartphone that distinguishes it from other Windows Mobile® devices. with rates up to 384 Kbps. If you install ActiveSync® desktop software.2. Your smartphone uses Windows Mobile® 5. It uses W-CDMA as the underlying technology. Windows Mobile The operating system of your Treo 750 smartphone. When installing third-party applications to your smartphone. you do not need to give your smartphone a username. you are asked to give your smartphone a username.UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) One of the third-generation (3G) mobile phone technologies that is designed for high-speed data transfer.

260 TERMS .

Maude Ave. (North America) Palm Inc. which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on. including interference that may cause undesired operation. This reduction in transmit power will result in a lower RF energy exposure and resulting SAR value. users MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories. however.gov/oet/rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Transmit power is controlled automatically and.5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit. Berkshire RG40 1PA. Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body (i. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. etc) and provides AT LEAST 1. and other agencies around the world have established limits that incorporate a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons using this equipment. UK REGULATORY INFORMATION 261 .com (Europe) Roy Bedlow Buckhurst Court London Road Wokingham. 950 W. the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • • • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. FCC RF Safety Statement In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines. See www. In order to certify this unit for sale in the US. during normal operation the unit will transmit much less than maximum power.e. Sunnyvale. However. An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps.palm. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. This equipment generates. Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits. in general is reduced as you get closer to a cellular base station. CA 94085 USA www. clips. • • This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. The unit of measurement for human exposure to RF energy is “Specific Absorption Rate” (SAR). These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Industrie Canada (IC). RF energy can be absorbed into the human body and potentially can cause adverse health effects if excessive levels are absorbed. Often.fcc. on the lap or in a breast pocket).Regulatory information FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computer peripheral. uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions. Canada and Europe this unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding exposure to RF Energy. • A Palm® brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Responsible party RF Safety Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy (SAR) Radio transmitting devices radiate Radio Frequency (RF) energy during its operation. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC). SAR was measured with the unit transmitting at its maximum certified RF power.

2 Spectrum Usage 0984 (notified body) CE.palm.Declaration of Conformity We. 94085 U. Identification mark This identification mark is permanently provided on the device label. Maximum SAR Values (W/kg) CE Band Head SAR GSM 900 0.741 PCS 1800 0.A. We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance to all essential requirements of the RTTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The conformity assessment procedure referred to Article 10 and detailed in Annex IV of directive 1999/5/EC has been related to Articles: • • • R&TTE Article 3.244 WCDMA 2100 0. visit www. and USB cable) where applicable.S. The declaration applies to the smartphone and its associated accessories (power supply. 2006 Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate FCC regulations. The technical documentation relevant to the above equipment will be held at: Palm Inc. declare under sole responsibility that the product: Model name: Description: Treo 750 PDA phone Person responsible for making this declaration: Is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative document: • • • • • • • ETSI EN 301 511 ETSI EN 301 908-1 ETSI EN 301 908-2 ETSI EN 300 328 ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24 EN60950-1 EN 50360 David Woo/Sr Compliance Engineer Sunnyvale/August 31. headset. 262 REGULATORY INFORMATION . Potentially Unsafe Areas Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your smartphone when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere. CA. such as fueling areas (gas or petrol stations) or storage facilities for fuel or chemicals.1 (a) Health and Safety R&TTE Article 3.447 To view the highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo 750.. 950 W Maude Avenue Sunnyvale. Declaration of Conformity Treo 750 Palm declares that the above model of Treo 750 is compliant with the regulations below. Palm Inc.com/41057 .1 (b) EMC R&TTE Article 3. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

to communicate by telephone. repeat the steps above. and then select either On or Off. A keyboard icon appears at the top of your Today screen whenever TTY is enabled. observe these guidelines: Potentially Unsafe Areas/Potentially explosive atmospheres Obey all signs and instructions regarding turning off your smartphone. In particular. To disable TTY. Select Personal. Select Phone.FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C Safety: EN 60950: 2000 (Jan-2000) Radiated Emissions: EN 55022 FCC ID: O8F-KITT IC ID: 3905A-KITT Using TTY A TTY (also known as TDD or text telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing. Your Palm Treo 750 smartphone is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your smartphone through the headset jack. turn off your smartphone when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere. such as REGULATORY INFORMATION 263 . Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission. For the safe and efficient operation of your radio. Read this information before using your integrated multi-service portable radio. or who have speech or language disabilities. and then select Phone. 1 2 3 4 5 Press Start and select Settings. Press OK. Please contact your wireless service provider’s customer service department for more information. To use TTY. but you cannot use your headset jack with a headset or hands-free kit while this mode is enabled. you may need to make additional arrangements with your wireless service provider. Select the TTY/TDD list. Operational Warnings IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION.

Not carry the smartphone in a breast pocket. Check with the manufacturer or representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF energy. it is recommended that you place your smartphone at a safe distance from your ear. Persons with pacemakers should: • ALWAYS keep the smartphone more than six inches from their pacemaker when the smartphone is turned ON. In the event a smartphone user should experience any disorientation. and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such as metal powders. and see a doctor if discomfort persists. should the air bag inflate. Please note that use of certain data applications can result in heavy battery use and may require frequent battery charging. make sure to take necessary breaks from use. may cause some people to experience blackout or seizure. consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy.fueling areas (gas or petrol stations. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by the recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. follow all instructions regarding the operation of your smartphone. could propel the smartphone. you may experience discomfort in your neck. Any disposal of the smartphone must comply with laws and regulations pertaining to lithium ion batteries. such as those experienced with television or playing video games. Repetitive Motion Injuries When using the keyboard or playing games on your smartphone. Aircraft While in aircraft. arms. Use of your smartphone while on board on aircraft must be done in accordance in compliance with airline instructions and regulations. view the screen from the farthest distance and avoid exposure to blinking lights if you are tired. or other musculoskeletal disorder. When using the speakerphone feature. carpal tunnel syndrome. hands. Also check with the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to the vehicle. Individuals with personal or family history of such events should consult a doctor before using the device. You may want to consult your doctor in the event of you experience interference with your hearing aid while using your smartphone. To limit the possibility of such symptoms. Turn the smartphone OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. below deck on boats). Interference to Medical and Personal Electronic Devices Most but not all electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals and certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your smartphone. • • • Audio Safety Some hearing aids may be affected by some digital smartphone models. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. even if never experienced before. blasting areas and areas near electrical blasting caps. use in a well lighted area. such as tendonitis. storage facilities for fuel or chemicals. Blackouts and Seizures Blinking lights. Vehicles with Air Bags Your smartphone should not be placed in a position that would affect the operation of air bag deployment or in a position that. Turn your smartphone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device. eye or muscle twitching or other involuntary movements. Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six inches (6") be maintained between a smartphone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. shoulders. take longer rests (such as several hours) if discomfort or tiring begins. Battery Your smartphone includes an internal lithium ion battery. loss of awareness. 264 REGULATORY INFORMATION . stop use immediately and consult a doctor. wherever possible every hour take a minimum of 15 minutes. Interference to Other Electronic Devices RF energy may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating and entertainment systems in motor vehicles. and dust) in the air. Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to protect within a vehicle that has air bags. To avoid any injury. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. grains. convulsion. of other parts of the body.

Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving. Remember. Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. if necessary. check the road and your mirrors. if necessary. Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. suspend phone conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road. work to memorize the smartphone keypad so you can use the speed-dial function without taking your attention off the road. your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. let your voice mail answer it for you. Dial 9-1-1 to report serious emergencies -it’s free from your smartphone! Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip. then continue. Position your smartphone within easy reach. Make sure you place your smartphone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic.Driving Safety Tips Overview Always obey all laws and regulations on the use of the smartphone in your driving area. but so is heavy traffic. or writing a “to do” list. If you are reading an address book or business card while driving a car. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your smartphone or a 8 2 REGULATORY INFORMATION 265 . 7 Driving Safety Tips Details 1 Get to know your smartphone and its features such as speed-dial and redial. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary. red light or otherwise stationary. sleet. then you are not watching where you are going. When available. suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic. But if you need to dial while driving. 6 4 3 speaker phone accessory. place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. use a hands-free device. Your smartphone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situations-with your smartphone at your side. When available. Rain. Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving. Also. such as speed-dial and redial. 1 Get to know your smartphone and its features. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most smartphone models offer including. road hazard. 9-1-1is a free call on your smartphone! 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary. As a driver. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. snow and ice can be hazardous. if possible. traffic accident. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time. The Wireless Industry reminds you to use your smartphone safely when driving. Safety — Your most important call. Use your smartphone to call for help. suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. automatic redial and memory dial-most smartphone models can store up to 99 numbers in memory dial. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mix-they are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel. Dial 9-1-1 in the case of fire. or medical emergencies. use a hands-free device. take advantage of these devices if available to you. place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Don’t get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles. if possible. follow this simple tip-dial only a few numbers. or attempt to coincide your calls with times you may be stopped at a stop sign. help is only three numbers away. A number of hands-free smartphone accessories are readily available today. Position your smartphone within easy reach. It’s common sense. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your attention from the road.

so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. FDA derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the Radiation Control provisions of the Federal Food.9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies.gov/telecom. and Cosmetic Act (originally enacted as the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968).gov/cdrh/comp/eprc. FCC derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) and the Telecommunications Act of 1996 http://www. The radio waves travel through the air until they reach a receiver at a nearby base station. If you see an auto accident. please go to the FCC’s Consumer Alert on accessibility of digital wireless phones at http://www.html]. as you would want others to do for you.fcc. call 9-1-1. NOTICE FOR CONSUMERS WITH HEARING DISABILITIES Digital Wireless Phones to be Compatible with Hearing Aids On July 10.html]. This means that wireless phone manufacturers and service providers must make digital wireless phones accessible to individuals who use hearing aids. For more information. AND YOUR PALM DEVICE Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device. the message travels through the telephone network until it reaches a base station close to your wireless phone.gov/cgb/ consumerfacts/accessiblewireless. it picks up your voice and converts the sound to radio frequency energy (or radio waves). 10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. But you can still use your smartphone to lend a hand. often called cell. 1-800-881-7256 STATIC ELECTRICITY. Wireless telephones are two-way radios. FDA monitors the health effects of wireless telephones. or PCS phones. call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. 266 REGULATORY INFORMATION . a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured. but are not urgent enough to merit a call to 9-1-1. [http://www. mobile. When you talk into a wireless telephone. or other serious emergency where lives are in danger. ESD.fcc.fda. These phones are popular with callers because they can be carried easily from place to place. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention. Drug. When you receive a call on your wireless telephone. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) each regulate wireless telephones. Wireless telephones are hand-held phones with built-in antennas. a broken traffic signal. or a vehicle you know to be stolen. Each agency has the authority to take action if a wireless phone produces hazardous levels of RF energy. Then the base station sends out radio waves that are detected by a receiver in your telephone. crime in progress. FCC ensures that all wireless phones sold in the United States follow safety guidelines that limit radio frequency (RF) energy. The base station then sends your call through the telephone network until it reaches the person you are calling. Updated 7/16/2003 Hands-Free Capability All CTIA Certified portable products provide the consumer with a toll-free number for the purchase of a compatible hands-free device. 2003. the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) modified the exemption for wireless phones under the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard. where the signals are changed back into the sound of a voice. Your smartphone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a “good Samaritan” in your community.html.

a discharge event can occur. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products. l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. you may get a shock— the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob.palm. • • REGULATORY INFORMATION 267 . or disconnect electronic devices. For example. you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD. after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet. building up electrons on your body. Devices that you carry with you. ESD unfortunately exists and. You can do this in many ways. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity. including your Palm® device. take measures to help protect your electronic devices.com/fr pour plus d'informations. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing. such as your Palm device. • While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge 0ectricity. Consultez notre site web www. placing the device in a cradle. To most people. Increase the relative humidity of your environment. if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events.) The rapidity with which you touch. Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. Then. ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry. when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station. connect.com/environment. static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. unless neutralized. if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet. so when working with electronic devices.Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. For example. or connecting it to any other device. including the following: • Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. such as grounding mats. build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. from ESD harm. Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body. Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. A pleine puissance. Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following: • • Low relative humidity. Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing.palm. synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your Palm device to your computer. For appropriate recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www. For example. Install ESD-specific prevention items.

268 REGULATORY INFORMATION .

5 mm.0 Still image capture resolution:1280 x 1024. 3-barrel connector) Microphone mute option TTY compatible Samsung processor—300MHz miniSD card slot Rechargeable Lithium Ion 1200mAh power Removable for replacement 3 hours full charge time Windows Mobile Pocket PC Phone Edition 5. Class B EDGE UMTS PS data HSDPA Category 12 Personal speakerphone Hands-free headset jack (2.3 megapixel 2x digital zoom Phone features • • • • Processor technology Expansion Battery • • • • • • Operating system Camera • • • SPECIFICATIONS 269 . 1.Specifications Radio • • • • • • • Dual mode GSM/UMTS phone GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band UMTS 850/1900/2100 tri-band GPRS Multi-slot Class 10.

3mm) 5.34 in.9mm x 59.84 in.3mm x 21. x 0.Size Weight Connectivity Display • 4.536 colors (16-bit color) Resolution: 240 x 240 User-adjustable brightness Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator Backlight for low lighting conditions Keyboard • • 270 SPECIFICATIONS . (112.44 in.0 compliant) Bluetooth wireless technology (1. x 2.4 ounces (154 grams) Infrared (1.2 compliant) ® • • • • • • • Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus) 65.

multimedia.Included software • Today/Phone (includes Speed Dial and Dial Pad) Messaging (text. and email) Internet Explorer Mobile (web browser) Camera Pictures & Videos Windows Media Player Mobile File Explorer Contacts Calendar Tasks • • • • • • • • • • • • Notes Calculator ActiveSync ® • Excel Mobile Word Mobile PowerPoint Mobile Voice Command Quick Tour Search Terminal Services Picsel PDF Viewer Bluetooth Plug-in • • • • • • • • System requirements • Windows 2000 or XP (later versions may also be supported) 32MB of available memory (RAM) 170MB of free hard disk space Available USB port 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C) 5% to 90% RH • • • Operating and storage temperature range • • SPECIFICATIONS 271 .

272 SPECIFICATIONS .

229. 207 activating items on screen 20 active call info 42 active calls. 19. 119. 94. 74 accented characters 26. 68. 210 calculator 201 Calendar application 153 Contacts application 151 Dial Pad 38 File Explorer 190 information 29. 72. 138 3GPP2 files 102. 138 5-way navigator 5. See phone calls ActiveSync defined 255 installing 68 opening 73 receiving email and 92 synchronizing with 67. 221 removing email 90 setting up email 88 setting up instant messaging 113 troubleshooting 244 Accounts tab 90. 221 instant messages 113 Internet Explorer 117 menu items 20. 122.Index SYMBOLS ! on battery icon 10 NUMERICS 112 calls 35. 239– 243 INDEX 273 . 250 911 calls 35. 214 1st day of week option 158 3GP files 142 3GPP files 102. 247 Wireless Manager 33 accounts conference calls and 46 customer service support for 253 missing phone numbers and 14 preventing unauthorized use of 214. 17. 20 actions 20. 96 action keys 5. 29 web pages 117. 214 A AC charger 9. 21. 239 troubleshooting 229. 27 accessing ActiveSync 73 alternate characters 26 applications 28. 22 Messaging app 101 Notes application 161 on-device documentation 253 online address books 95 options in lists 22 Outlook folders 241 Palm online support 253 PDF Viewer 169 Phone Settings screen 13 Pictures & Videos application 138 Quick Tour 253 remote files 225 speed-dial buttons 36 spreadsheet templates 178 Streaming Media application 144 Tasks application 159 Tasks entry bar 161 the Internet 224. 236 Today screen 12.

156 address book 94. 176 After calls from numbers… option 58 Agenda View (calendar) 153 alarm clock 220 alarm sounds 220 alarms adding 154. 160 setting 208. 97 addresses adding 151 checking for 97 copying 241 entering email 91. 98. 220 turning on and off 207 Alarms tab 220 albums 138 alert tones. ringtones aligning the screen 209 alignment settings documents 172 spreadsheets 176 Allow cookies check box 123 Allow USB connections check box 240 274 INDEX .ActiveSync icon 73. 97. 163 online address book 94– 95 passkeys 126 signatures 96. 155 attachments to email 91. 241 Address List Lookup 189 address messaging options 97 Address tab 94. 247 synchronizing 241 adjusting screen brightness 208 Advanced tab (Power Settings) 223 advancing slides 175. 151 document templates 170 expansion cards 197 files to playlists 146 folders 173 notes 152. See alarms. 255 ActiveSync Plug-in for Bluetooth 81 Add a new VPN server connection option 225 Add Contact prompt 44 Add Favorite dialog box 120 Add Media command 104 Add Picture command 104 Add Recipient command 101 Add Server Source command 77 Add Sound command 104 Add to Contacts command 107 Add to Favorites command 120 Add to Personal Address Book command 241 adding a second call 44 applications 210 appointments 154. 118 looking up corporate 189 multiple recipients and 102 selecting 20. 153. 97 entering web 30. 167. 76. 57. 190 bookmarks 119 bulleted or numbered lists 172 caller ID pictures 151 connections 225 contacts 44. 95. 111 speed-dial buttons 48 spreadsheets 176 tasks 159 untimed events 155. 161.

19 moving to expansion cards 200 opening 28. 255 alternate characters 26. 222 downloading 191. 250 losing information in 231 moving through 18. 210 phone calls and 43 reinstalling 229. 27 alternate characters list 26. 199. 174. 192 error reporting for 221 included with device 271 installing 191–192. 137. 45 antenna 262 Appearance tab 205. 98. 250 displaying 28. 222 copying 200 customizing 210–214 deleting 194. 142. 27 AMR files 102 animation 142. 22 closing 28. 83 troubleshooting 231. 231 running from expansion cards 199. 233 turning sounds on or off for 207 viewing memory usage for 222 Appointment tab 154 appointments adding 154 appearing in wrong time slots 242 deleting 158 hiding 156 marking as private 156 reminders for 154 scheduling repeating 155 viewing 153 Appointments tab 158 Area code option 153 arrow icons 17 ascending sort order 182 ASF files 138 Assign a program list 211 attachments adding 91. 211 applications See also third-party applications associating with buttons 211 battery life and 11 caution for hard resets and 231 choosing menu items in 21. 264 auto-completion options 213 AutoCorrect command 141 Autofill option 180 AutoFilter command 183 AutoFilter settings (spreadsheets) 177 auto-keyguard feature 214.Alt key 24. 249. 175 anniversaries 156 Answer button 39 answering the phone 39. 210 application icons 28. 190 downloading 93 embedded objects in 94 internal memory and 250 opening 93 storing 93. 215 Auto-Keyguard list 215 INDEX 275 . 250 running multiple 28 selecting 28 storing 250 synchronizing information in 69. 97 troubleshooting 246 Attendees option 156 audio 39.

127 troubleshooting 237 Bluetooth icon 53. 127 sending information over 125. 26 backup and restore application 76 backup utilities 229. 54 overview 124 synchronizing over 81 Bluetooth devices beaming to 196 connecting to 52–54. 232 replacing 232–233 specifications for 269 viewing remaining power for 223 viewing status of 63 battery door 8 battery door release 6 battery icon 10 Battery Power tab 25 battery status icons 63 Battery tab 223 Beam File command 195 Beam tab 197 Beam… command 196 beaming 12. 231. 255 BMP files 138 Bold option 172 bookmarks 119 See also favorites border highlight 19 borders 176 276 INDEX . 53. 255 birthdays 156 blank screens 234 Block incoming calls list 58 Block outgoing calls list 58 blocking phone calls 58 Bluetooth connections battery level and 124 battery life and 11 checking status of 53 communicating over 52 hands-free devices and 52. 243 backups. 24. 64. 205 backing up information 65. restoring 232. 140. 124 Bluetooth Plug-in 125. 147. 129 Bluetooth Settings screen 124–127 Bluetooth wireless technology 115. 223 backlight shut-off interval 25 Backspace key 20. 231 backlight (keyboard) 24. 232. 195–197. 243 battery Bluetooth connections and 124 charging 9–10 conserving power for 223 disposing of 232. 264 inserting 8 maximizing life of 11–12 purchasing 9 removing 231. 195. 190.Automatically download MMS messages check box 110 auto-off interval 255 available memory 222 available storage space 222 B back view (device) 6 backgrounds 133. 229. 124–127 creating partnerships for 125 discovery setting for 127 phone calls and 54 receiving information over 125.

See web browsing built-in applications 194. adjusting 208 browsing files and folders 190. 201 Calculator application 201 calculator buttons 202 Calculator icon 201 calendar adding items to 155. 158. 156 displaying 153 removing events 158 setting alarms for 154 setting options for 158 unavailable slots on 157 Calendar application adding contacts and 151 customizing 158–159 managing schedules with 154–158 selecting views 153 starting 153 untimed events in 155 calendar options 158–159 Calendar views 153. 159 call forwarding 47 call forwarding icon 47 Call Log 38 Call Sender command 107 call waiting 45 call-barring password 58 caller ID applications 249 caller ID blocking 44 caller ID pictures 133. 271 built-in camera. 214 Capitalize first letter of sentence check box 214 Caps Lock icon 25 Caps Lock mode 25 captions 104 INDEX 277 . See camera bulleted lists 172 bullets 169 Burst mode 134 button settings 147 buttons assigning to media files 148 assigning voice commands to 211 associating with applications 211 creating speed-dial 48 disabling 215 editing speed-dial 49 opening menus and 20 reassigning 211 selecting or activating 19 showing voicemail 49 turning sounds on or off for 207 Buttons icon 211 Buttons list 211 Buttons screen 211 Buttons tab (Options) 147 C CAB files 192 calculations 179. 151 caller IDs 59 call-waiting notifications 59 camcorder icon 134 camera battery life and 11 capturing videos with 135 specifications for 269 taking pictures 133–134 troubleshooting 248 camera lens 6 Camera Preview Mode 248 camera settings 136–137 Camera tab 137 Cancel Bluetooth command 54 Cancel Mute command 43 capitalization 25. 200 browsing the web.brightness.

10 charger cable 9 charging device 9. 210 command button 212. 11 device battery 9–10 charging status 10 Chart command 183. 184 Chat icon 108 chat sessions 107. 25. undoing 141 changing alarm sounds 220 color themes 205. 183. 161 cell patterns (spreadsheets) 176 cell phones. 213 phone calls and 49 scrolling 18 text messages and 101. voice commands company lists 33 company names 38. 222 menus 22 notification messages 106 screens 19 color settings 248 color themes 205. 152 comparisons 183 completed tasks 160 compliancy statement 262 components (Treo device) 1 compressed files 191 278 INDEX . 184 chart options 184 charts 177. 102 typing alternate 26 charge indicator 5. 220 Clock & Alarms Settings screen 219. 184 categories contacts 152 events 157 playlists 145 tasks 160.Carrier call forwarding and 47 conference calls and 46 TTY devices and 263 cascading menus 22 case-sensitive searching 171. 135. 248 PIN numbers 217 speed-dial buttons 49 text 170 text size 208 character entry 27 character sets 122 characters capitalizing 25. See wireless phones certificates 117. 220 closing applications 28. 111 Chat tab 111 check boxes 19 chronological list of calls 38 Clear Cookies button 123 Clear History button 123 Clear Now Playing command 146 Clear Type tab 208 clearing web links 123 Clock & Alarms icon 219. 221 Certificates icon 221 Certificates screen 221 changes. 212 See also menus. 184 picture or video resolution 134. 210 connections 225 contacts 152 date and time settings 219 email accounts 90 information 71. 213 commands 20. 214 entering 24. 179.

224. 127 connection icons 226 Connection Settings command 240 connections adding 225 changing 225 displaying 225 ending 226 losing 238 manually starting 225 precautions for 267 removing Bluetooth 127 setting up 224–226 setting up wireless 128– 130 timing out 244 troubleshooting 235–238. 103 assigning ringtones to 49. 101. 139. 153 making calls to 36 INDEX 279 . 152 changing 152 displaying 152 linking speed-dial buttons to 48 looking up 30. 225. 56. 237. 151 addressing messages to 91. 74 enabling dial-up networking for 128 installing from 193 reinstalling desktop software on 229 synchronizing with 71. 247 trusted devices and 127 Connections icon 224 Connections screen 224. 82. 224 connectivity specs 270 conserving battery power 223 contact categories 152 contacts adding 44. 57. 236 to TTY devices 57 to VPNs 225 to web sites 117. 124–127 to hands-free car kits 52. 238 Connections tab 197. 83 system requirements 71 viewing videos and pictures on 141 Conference button 46 conference calls 46 confidential events 157 Confidential option 157 configurations troubleshooting 237 Configure Server command 246 configuring data services 237 mail servers 246 TTY devices 57 Confirm message deletions check box 110 confirmation messages 112 Connect command 225 Connect via Bluetooth command 81 Connect via IR command 82 connecting charger cable 9 device to PCs 74 headsets 50 to a headset 126 to Bluetooth devices 52– 54. 97. 36. 126 to mobile networks 235 to service providers 224 to the Internet 129.computers connecting to 71.

200 copying addresses 241 applications 200 items in folders 191 phone numbers 37. 122 pictures and videos 139 text 121. 107. 244 cropping pictures 141 currency symbols 209 Currency tab 209 customer assistance 253 Customize the playlists… check box 143 customizing applications 210–214 Calendar 158–159 camera 136–137 chat settings 111 Contacts application 152 dates and time 219 email settings 96 Excel Mobile 186 format settings 209 Internet Explorer Mobile 122–123 Media Player Mobile 146 Messaging application 110–112 network settings 112 Notes application 163 phone 54–62 280 INDEX .personalizing 56 removing 152 saving information for 44 selecting communication method for 37 sending messages to 102. 44. 246 corporate networks 221 corporate servers 225. 178 text messages 101 untimed events 155. 170 email messages 90 folders 173 multimedia messages 102 notes 161. 33. 140. 111 speed-dial buttons 48 spreadsheets 176 tasks 159 templates 107. 156 viewing details list for 37 Contacts application 151– 153 Contacts list 37. 163 online address book 94– 95 partnerships 125 passkeys 126 playlists 145 signatures 96. 101. 156 video ringtones 139 workbooks 177 credentials 226. 155 bookmarks 119 bulleted or numbered lists 172 caller ID pictures 151 connections 225 contacts 44. 151 documents 168. 152 context-sensitive menus 22 continuous playback (slides) 176 cookies 117 Copy command 121. 170. 171 copyrighted items 139 corporate mail systems 225. 235 Create chat from messages option 111 creating appointments 154. 171. 39. 57. 246 coupling 251 coverage area 12.

236. 174. software device additional information for 253 caution for electrostatic discharge and 267 INDEX 281 . 250 Bluetooth connections 127 certificates 221 contacts 152 directory services 95 documents 174 email accounts 90 events 158 favorites 120 files 191. 255 See also applications. 55 Word Mobile 174 Cut command 140. 236 data transmission speeds 1 date format settings 209 Date tab 209 dates 180. 110 notes 163 partnerships 127. 250 items from libraries 145 items from playlists 146 items in folders 190 messages 97. 158 day-planner formats 153 decimal places 209 decimal symbols 209 decompression utility 191 default document template 174 default format settings 209 Default mode option 163 Default option 118 default PINs 216 Default template option 164 Default zoom level options 214 defined names (spreadsheets) 181 delays 34. 238 pictures 141 speed-dial buttons 50 tasks 161 text 20 web files 123 workbooks 186 worksheets 186 descending sort order 182 Desktop option 118 desktop software 229. 245 data services 1. See deleting D daily schedules 153 data 231 See also information data connection icons 226 data filters 158. 171 cutting. 209.system settings 219–224 system sounds 206 tasks 161 Today screen 205 voicemail system 49. 186 Delete Contact command 152 Delete Files button 123 Delete Task command 161 Deleted folder 98. 237 Delete Appointment command 158 Delete Cells command 185 Delete command 109. 109. 219 See also calendar Day View 153. 183 data formats 209 data service icons 236 data service providers 224. 250 deleting applications 194.

262 unlocking 217 updating information on 65. 39 dialing 12. 218 low lighting conditions and 24 management tools for 187 moving around on 15 not responding 230. 5–7 connecting to PCs 74 disabling touch-sensitivity for 215 disposing of 264 features described 1 freeing space on 194. 97 Disable touchscreen check box 216 Disconnect Bluetooth command 82 Disconnect command 226 discoverable setting 127 discovering trusted devices 124. 127 physically-impaired disabilities and 57 radio frequency emissions and 261. device battery life and 11 beaming to 195 compliancy for 263 configuring TTY/TTD 57 discovering trusted 124. 71 usage guidelines for 261. 265 device names. 221 dimmed images 234 Direct Push Technology 76 directory service 94. 49 dialog boxes 256 dial-up networking 127. 127 disk space 271 See also memory 282 INDEX . 38. 249 troubleshooting 253 turning on and off 33. 249 personalizing 203 required items for 2 resetting 217. 38. 125. 128 digit grouping 209 digital cameras 138 See also camera digital certificates 117. 250 getting help with 227. 235 setting up 7–14 specifications for 269 system requirements for 271 third-party applications and 248. 11 compatibility with third-party vendors 71 compatible hands-free devices for 52 compliancy statement for 262 components of 1. 125. 264 transferring information from 229 troubleshooting 237 Devices tab 125. 238 diagnostic information 221 Dial Lookup list 13 Dial Pad 37. 235. See usernames Device Setup Wizard 143 devices See also Bluetooth devices.caution for resetting 231 caution for storing 6 charging 9. 34–37. 253 getting phone number for 13 locking 217 losing 76. 95. 230–232.

253 documents See also Word Mobile application creating 168. 142 multimedia messages 105. 170 deleting 174 finding and replacing text in 170 moving or copying text in 171 opening 170 organizing 173 saving 168. 23 scrolling through 18 selecting items in 20. 208 on-device documentation 253 PDF files 169 pictures 133. 110 Palm-specific information and updates 253 pictures 138 ringtones 54 videos 142 Downloads favorite 121 downward-pointing arrows 22 drained battery 11 drawing 162 drivers 230 driving safety tips 265 Drop and Answer command 45 drop-down lists accessing 22 exiting 23 highlighting in 18. 192 attachments 93 email 79. 174 sending 85 setting margins for 172 spell-checking 173 supported features for 169 unsupported features for 169 documents list 174 DOT files 168 downloading applications 191. 141 web pages 117. 171. 222 tasks 160. 174 documentation 2. 161 videos 133. 118 wireless settings 224 DOC files 168 document file types 168. 23 drop-down menus 22 INDEX 283 .Dismiss button 42 display formats 209 Display message on screen check box 208 display options (web) 118 display settings 208–210 See also screen displaying alternate characters 26 animated images 142 applications on device 28 appointments 153 calendar 153 contacts 37. 138. 141 power settings 223 Quick Tour documentation 253 running applications 222 space on expansion cards 200. 92 files 121 images 121. 157 folder contents 190 memory usage 222 multimedia messages 107 notifications 56. 138. 152 current connection 225 daily schedules 153 events 155. 170.

152 Edit Server Settings screen 77 Edit Speed Dial command 49. 126 passwords 78. 246 troubleshooting 244–246 email accounts changing 90 deleting 90 setting up 88 troubleshooting 244 email applications 247 E-mail button 92 email client software 246 email message icons 109 embedded images 94 emergency calls 35. 37. 214 web addresses 30. 119. 214 emoticons 102 Enable Clear Type check box 208 Enable fixed dialing check box 61 Enable local network time check box 220 encoding options 122 encryption 117 End Show command 175 End User License Agreement 2 ending active calls 43 data connections 226 playback 144 wireless connections 130 endnotes 169 entering alternate characters 26. 98 dialing from 39 downloading 79. 98. 118 284 INDEX . 239. 50 editing. 34. 25 owner information 218 passkeys 53. 27 data in spreadsheets 177. 98. 245 synchronizing 11. See changing electrostatic discharge 266 email adding address book for 94–95 adding attachments to 91. 217 phone numbers 12. 89. 92.DUN connections 128–130 See also dial-up networking E earpiece 5. 156 forwarding 95 getting from corporate servers 225. 92 entering contacts and 151. 38 PINs 216 text 213. 245. 180 information 25–26 numbers 24. 246 getting from Exchange Servers 92 internal memory and 250 priority settings for 91 receiving attachments with 93 reply options for 97 requirements for 1 selecting addresses 20 sending 92. 251 echoes 251 EDGE connections 256 Edit command 140. 190 addressing 91. 97 creating 90 deleting 97.

185. 146. 82. 97 transferring files to 142. 190 storing attachments on 93.Entire column option 185 Entire row option 185 entry fields deleting text in 20 highlighting in 18. 243 error reporting 221–222 Error Reporting icon 222 Error Reporting screen 222 errors 221. 235. 244 troubleshooting 244. 222 expanding lists in fields 23 expansion card slot 6. 222 inserting 197–198 installing apps on 193 moving apps to 200 moving information to 173. 259 Exchange Address Book 241 Exchange Server credentials screen 244 Exchange Server sync options 78. 243. 156 deleting 158 filtering 157 hiding 156 marking as sensitive 156 reminders for 154 selecting sounds for 208 setting notification preferences for 207 Events check box 207 Excel files 165 See also Excel Mobile. 269 expansion cards as storage medium 250 browsing on 200 displaying available space on 200. spreadsheets Excel Mobile application customizing 186 display settings for 178 overview 176 searching in 184 starting 177 supported features 176 unsupported features 177 Excel Mobile icon 177 Exchange ActiveSync 246. 200 types supported 197 extensions (phone) 49 external power sources 223 External Power tab 25 INDEX 285 . See deleting error messages 207. 246 exiting applications 28. 256. 200 opening items on 199 removing 198 renaming 201 searching on 189. 20 moving to 18 opening drop-down lists in 23 scrolling through 18 Erase all data? prompt 232 erasing. 69. 244 Exchange Servers accessing 153 getting email from 92 setting up accounts for 77–79 synchronizing with 11. 199. 197. 243 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 266 Even when roaming check box 110 event categories 157 event icons 159 Event list 207 events creating 155.

120 sorting contents 190 synchronizing messages in 92 Font color option 172 Font command 172 Font option 172 fonts 169. 208 footers 169 footnotes 169 forgetting passwords 217 format settings 209 286 INDEX . 250 downloading 121 moving 173. 183 tasks 160 filters 158. 176. 36. 185. 189 file types displaying 174 documents 168 Media Player 142 multimedia 102 pictures 138 videos 138 files accessing from corporate accounts 225 browsing 190 decompressing 191 deleting 191. 201 File Explorer icon 190 file names 171. 200 fill series (spreadsheets) 180 Filter command 152. 17. 250 fixed dialing 61 folder names 173 folders accessing Outlook 241 adding documents to 171 arranging pictures and videos in 140 browsing 190. 157 Filter option 160 filtering events 157 information 152. 184 finding contacts 30. 49 Extra Digits text box 49 Extract command 46 F factory settings 148 factory-installed applications 194. 173 moving items to 173. 173. See entry fields File Explorer 189. 153 Find/Replace command 170. 190 selecting multiple 191 transferring to expansion cards 142. 146. 190–191. 271 favorites 119–120 See also web pages Favorites button 120 Favorites command 120 FCC Statement 261 features 1 Federal Trade Commission website 222 feedback 251 fields. 153 information 184 text 170 firewalls 239 5-way navigator 5. 19. 199.Extra Digits button 41. 191 opening items in 190 organizing web favorites in 119. 172. 200 creating 120. 183 Find Online command 95. 191 saving 199 searching for 189.

263. 23 text 20. 181– 182 system data 209 text 172 Formatting toolbar 173 forms (web) 119 formulas 176. 179 G games 11 getting started 2. 250 Freeze Panes option 178 front view (device) 5 full charge (battery) 9 Full Screen option 118 functions (spreadsheets) 176. 126 hands-free devices connecting to 52 purchasing 266 setting up 50 tips for 54. 231 hardware 1 Hardware buttons check box 207 headers 169 headset button 51 headset jack 5 headsets configuring as trusted devices 124 connecting 50–51. 95. 43 hard resets 217. 126. 3. 107 phone calls 47 freeing memory 194. 265 troubleshooting 237. 238 hands-free car kit 50. 142 Global Address List 94. 172 Hint tab 218 INDEX 287 . 264.formats. 138. 253 GIF files 102. 243. 238 turning Keyguard on or off for 215 hanging indents 173 hanging up phone 13. 54. 179. 185 Forward command 95 forwarding messages 95. 126 disabling Keyguard and 215 hearing-impaired 57. 22 options in lists 18. 253 Help topics 28 hiding appointments 156 events 156 images 118 speed-dial buttons 36 Tasks entry bar 161 highlight 19 Highlight option 172 highlighting applications 28 items in folders 191 items on screen 18. losing 168 formatting charts 184 paragraphs and lists 172 spreadsheets 176. 19– 20 menu items 21. 12. 266 heat sources 12 help 227. 153 Global Address List Lookup 189 Glossary 255 Go to Slide command 175 GPRS connections 256 graphics programs 140 H Hands Free check box 54.

205 troubleshooting web page 247 IMAP accounts 88. 90. See IR port infrared transmissions 82. 249. 232 searching for 171. troubleshooting 231. 33 information accessing 29. 123 Hold button 42 home locations 219 Home page option 122 Hotmail accounts 113 hypertext links. 93 inactivity 134. 71. 10. 223 Inbox 18. 239 transferring 65. 221 backing up 65.hints (passwords) 218 History command 122. 92. 185. 69. 213 Input screen 213 inserting expansion cards 197–198 installation. 250 synchronizing 68. 183 losing 168. 231 moving 173. 71 infrared port. 231 changing 71. 189–190 sharing 194 sorting 182 storing 197. 184. 144 History list 122. 109 Inbox application 90. 94 Include file attachments check box 93 incorrect passwords 217 Indentation setting 172 indented lists 169 indenting text 173 indicator light 5. 141. 234. 200 protecting 214–218 removing battery and 232 restoring 231. 229. 184 entering 25–26 erasing all 238 filtering 152. 250 bonus software 191 SIM smartcards 7–14 288 INDEX . 229 updating 65. See links I icons application 28. 211 battery status 10 data connections 226 data services 236 email 109 events 159 message status 109 navigator 17 phone status 62 signal-strength 33. 224 Identification tab 218 Ignore with text message command 40 IM messaging 113 image file types 138 image files 102. 250 images See also pictures dimmed 234 downloading 121 hiding web page 118 incorrect color settings and 248 receiving 94 setting background 140. 249 installing ActiveSync 68 applications 191–192. 256 Input icon 213 input options 24.

119 selecting 19. 214 locking 215 scrolling with 18 selecting menu items from 22 setting key combinations for 211 specifications for 270 troubleshooting 250 keyboard backlight 24. 154 Legacy Pocket Word files 169 libraries (media) 145 Library command 144 Library list 143 Library screen 143. 247 IR connections 196 IR port 6. 236 See also web browsing. See memory Internet 129. 82. 195. 223 keyboard icon 24 Keyguard 215 Keyguard icon 215 Known Caller option 55 L language-impaired 57 leading zeros 209 left action key 20. 144. 245 Italics option 172 Items tab 205 J JavaScript 117 JPEG files 102 JPG files 138 K keyboard accessing alternate characters on 26 dialing from 34 entering information from 25–26. 256 ISP mail systems 88 ISP settings 224 ISPs (Internet Service Providers) 224.synchronization software 71. 119 troubleshooting 247 list separators 209 List setting 172 Listen button 42 listening to media files 142 voicemail messages 42 lists accessing 22 INDEX 289 . 72 VPN clients 225 Windows drivers 230 instant messages 113 instant messaging applications 249 internal memory. 147 Library tab 147 lightening bolt 10 Li-Ion battery 256 See also battery links clearing web 123 internal memory and 250 media files and 145 messages and 108. 224. websites Internet Connection Speed option 147 Internet Explorer Mobile browsing with 117–122 closing 119 customizing 122–123 installing from 192 scrolling in 18 starting 117 unsupported elements for 117.

231 passwords 217 Treo device 76. 184 Match whole words only check box 171. 219 Lock icon 118. 222 290 INDEX .creating 169. 184 measurement units 209 media files creating playlists for 145 formats for 142 linking to 145 playing 143 synchronizing 143 transferring 142. See zoom settings mail servers 225. 23 navigating web page 119 scrolling through 18 selecting items in 20. 156. 36. 153 lookup feature 189 losing connections 238 information 168. 243. 159 memory available 271 freeing 194. 36. 153 information 184 location-specific information 209. 146 troubleshooting 242 media libraries 145 Media Player 242 Media Player Mobile 142– 148 media players 11 Media sync option 143 meeting requests 94. 95. 172 displaying alternate characters and 26 exiting 23 formatting 172 highlighting in 18. 250 low conditions for 29. 217 Lock screen 217 locking SIM smartcards 216 spreadsheet rows and columns 178 the keyboard 215 the screen 215 Treo device 217 logging in to corporate servers 225 networks 221 looking up contacts 30. 246 Main tab 222 Make the device discoverable check box 125 Make this device discoverable setting 127 Manage existing connections option 225 Manage Folders command 92 Manage tab 207 management tools 187 manually closing applications 29 MAPI clients 246 maps 247 margins 172 Match case box 171. 218 low coverage areas 235 low lighting conditions 24 lowercase letters 25 M magnet 6 magnification. 23 Lithium Ion battery 256 See also battery locating contacts 30. 139.

256 microphone 5. 109. 111.See Exchange ActiveSync Microsoft Office 165 Microsoft Office Excel 176 See also spreadsheets Microsoft Office Outlook. See Outlook Microsoft Windows Mobile software 192 Microsoft Windows Mobile website 229 INDEX 291 . 106. 111 addressing 102. notes menu items 21 Menu key 21. 107 invalid characters and 102 listening to 42 receiving notifications for 105. 103 automatically resending 111 creating email 90 deleting 97. 251 microphone icon 212 Microsoft ActiveSync. 110 dialing from 39 displaying notification 208 displaying status of 109 forwarding 95. See ActiveSync Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. 22 menus 20–22 Menus icon 210 Menus screen 210 Message Details command 107 message list 108. See messages.running apps and 28. voice notes adding signatures to 96. 109 Message Options command 105 Message Options screen 105 Message Priority list 105 message status icons 109 Message tab 96 Message validity period option 111 messages See also multimedia messages. 137. multimedia messages adding contacts and 151 chat sessions and 108 customizing 110–112 email settings in 96 messaging options in 105 notification options in 105 overview 101 play options in 106 starting 101 status icons in 109 messaging applications 249 messaging services 237. text messages. 199 storing numbers in 202 viewing expansion card 200 memory buttons 202 memory dial 265 Memory icon 200 memory options (web) 123 Memory screen 222 Memory Settings screen 29 Memory tab 123 memory usage 222 memos. 43. 237 saving 92 sorting 109 storing 250 Messages tab 110 Messaging application See also text messages.

146. 200 pictures and videos 139 speed-dial buttons 50 text 171 workbooks 185 moving around the screen 17–19 moving through web pages 118 MP3 files 142 MP4 files 142 MPEG files 138 MPEG4 files 102 MSN Hotmail 113 MSN Messenger 113 multi-connector 5 multi-line fields 18 multimedia features 99. 110 displaying 107 downloading 105. 193 Mobile Device icon 257 mobile devices 196. 191 files to expansion cards 142. 229 mobile networks 235 mobile phone numbers 151 mobile phones. 104. See wireless phones Mobile to Market certificates 191 Mobile-Based Device icon 194 Mode tab 125 Modem tab 225 ModemLink application 128 modems 127 Modify Sheets command 182. 199. 144. 131 multimedia file types 138 multimedia files 138. 256 mobile accounts. 206 See also media files music files 242 Mute command 43 My Device folder 190 292 INDEX . 142. 185. 250 multimedia messages creating 102 deleting 109. 186 Month View 153 most recently dialed numbers list 38 moving documents to folders 173. See accounts Mobile Device component (Windows) 256 Mobile Device folder 73. 134 Missed call option 55 MMS files 144 MMS messaging 101. 200 information 173. See MMS messaging multiple recipients 102 music 39. See documents MIDI files 102 miniSD cards 197 mirror 6.Microsoft Word documents. 108 setting options for 104 sorting 109 troubleshooting 237 Multimedia Messaging System. 110 forwarding 107 internal memory and 250 opening 106 overview 99 phone numbers in 39 playing 106–107 previewing 104 receiving 105 replying to 107 requirements for 1 saving 107 sending 103.

111. 178 workbooks 185 worksheets 181. 146 Now Playing screen 146 number format settings 209 number pad 12 number sign symbol 209 INDEX 293 . 164 Notes application 161–164 Notes icon 161 Notes list 163 Notes tab 152. 135 My Playlists category 145 My Storage Card library 145 My Text command 91 My Text phrases 91 My Windows Mobile-Based Device icon 194 N names 30. 19 negative numbers 209 network protocols 147 network settings 61. 147 networks changing 62 connecting to 62 logging in to 221 troubleshooting 235–238 New Account command 89 New Appointment command 154. 160 creating 161. 112 Network tab 62. 106. 207 notification screens. 155 New MMS command 103 New Partnership option 125 New Sound command 207 New Speed Dial command 48 notes adding 152. 173 expansion cards 201 folders 173 groups of pictures 137 speed-dial buttons 48 templates 170. 163 removing 163 saving 163. 231 My Pictures folder 133. 207 Now Playing playlist 145. 190. See notifications Notification tab 112 notifications changing event 207 closing 106 displaying 56 downloading sounds for 54 enabling or disabling 208 phone calls and 59 previewing sounds for 56 receiving messages and 105. 111 receiving phone calls and 45 receiving transmissions and 127 receiving voicemail 41 setting ringtones for 54 setting system sounds for 207 silencing sounds for 206 troubleshooting 237 Notifications check box 207 Notifications tab 55. 218 notification options 106.My Device library 145 My Documents folder 189. See 5-way navigator navigator buttons 17. 182 navigating the screen 17–19 navigating web pages 118 navigator. 259 naming document files 171.

23 selecting 22. 257 Option Lock icon 25 Option Lock mode 25 options displaying 157 highlighting 18. 95 Outlook E-mail screen 89. 259. 119. 123 Options screen (messaging) 96. 93 email client software and 246 entering information with 71 installing drivers for 230 synchronizing with 77. 213. 180 pasting into Calculator 202 O Off Hold button 42 Office Outlook. 22 multimedia messages 106 on-device documentation 253 Outlook folders 241 Phone Settings screen 13 Picsel PDF Viewer 169 Quick Tour 253 templates 178 text messages 106 Today screen 12. 29 One Column option 118 online address book 94. 95. 149 orientation (screen) 210 orientation (slides) 175 orientation options 210 Orientation tab 175 outages 237 Outbox 109 Outlook accessing folders for 241 copying addresses to 241 downloading messages from 92. 153 online support (Palm) 253 Open URL command 144 opening ActiveSync 73 alternate characters list 26 applications 28. 122 Wireless Manager 33 operating system (device) 234. 199. 218 organizer features 34.Number tab 209 numbered lists 172 numbers See also phone numbers entering 24. 97. 19. 23 Options screen (ActiveSync) 83 Options screen (Internet Explorer) 122. See documents offline synchronization 241 Off-peak times options 80 OK button 5. 110 Options tab 205. 91 overdue tasks 160 Override playback options 175 owner information 218 Owner Information icon 218 294 INDEX . 269 operating systems (PCs) 71 operational warnings 263 Option key 18. 29 web pages 117. 24. 210 attachments 93 calculator 201 Dial Pad 38 documents 170 email applications 247 File Explorer 190 items in folders 190 menus 20. 25 formatting 176. See Outlook Office Word documents. 25.

238. 249 Personal Address Book 241 personal computers connecting to 71. 126 Password tab 217 Password type list 217 passwords call-blocking and 58 corporate email accounts and 78 entering 78. device adjusting volume 13.Owner Information screen 218 P page breaks 170 paired devices 129 paired relationships. See personal computers PDF files 169 PDF Viewer 169 Peak times options 80 performance 233. 56 running applications and 43 selecting wireless band for 60 INDEX 295 . See partnerships Palm (online support) 253 Palm applications 192 Palm devices 74. 257 See also PIM applications Personal option 157 Personal tab 55 personalizing your device 203 phone See also phone calls. 216. 82. 257 passkeys 53. 45 customizing 54–62 dialing 12. 38. 255 personal information managers 241. 43 network settings for 61 ringtones for 54. 171 patches 194 patterns in workbooks 176 Pause playback option 106. 34–37. 74 enabling dial-up networking for 128 installing from 193 reinstalling desktop software on 229 synchronizing with 71. 49 disabling touch-sensitive feature for 215 hanging up 13. 229 Paragraph command 172 paragraph formatting 172 partial battery icon 10 partnerships 125. 147 PCS phones. phone numbers. 83 system requirements 71 viewing videos and pictures on 141 personal events 157 personal identification numbers (PINs) 61. 218. 258 personal information 217. 217 forgetting or losing 217 locking device and 215. 89. 217 saving 89 spreadsheets and 176 Paste command 140. See wireless phones PCs. See partnerships pairing. 56 advanced features 42–48 answering 39.

216 phone status icons 62 Phone tab 57. 107 placing on hold 42 receiving 39. 257 Phone Settings screen 13. 43 forwarding 47 hands-free devices and 50. 34. 23 scrolling through 18 selecting items in 20. phone calls assigning to speed-dial buttons 48 copying 37. 33 photo albums 138 photos.silencing ringer 40 specifications for 269 waking up screen for 43 phone calls See also phone. 141 creating caller ID 151 default resolution settings for 248 deleting 141 downloading 138 editing 140 hiding on web pages 118 naming groups of 137 previewing 134. 58. 257 Phone/Send icon 34 phone-off icon 11. 122 entering 12. 42. 251 Phone dialog box 39 phone headset 50–51 See also headsets Phone icon 216 phone lock feature 214 phone numbers See also phone. phone numbers adding a second 44 blocking 58 ending 13. 141 picture formats 138 Picture Speed Dial button 48 picture speed-dial buttons 36. 248 receiving 133 saving 137 sending 139 296 INDEX . 34. 14. 54 making 12. 57. 38. 48 pictures adding as backgrounds 140. 39. 35. 205 adding as screensaver 136 adding sounds to 104 adding to messages 103 adjusting resolution of 134. See pictures pick lists accessing 22 exiting 23 highlighting in 18. 58 Phone/Send button 5. 38 entering extra digits with 49 locating device 13 missing from Phone Settings screen 14 redialing most recent 38 saving 44 selecting 20 Phone Off message 33. 42 receiving notifications for 59 restricting 61 sending to voicemail 39 setting up conference 46 troubleshooting 237. 13. 37. 23 Picsel PDF Viewer 169 picture files 102.

175 Playback screen 146. 141 Pictures & Videos application 136. USB ports Power icon 223 Power screen 223 Power/End button 5. 248 sounds 56. See IR port. 112 private events 157 Private option 157 processor 269 Program Buttons tab 211 Program Files folder 200 Programs check box 207 Programs screen 28 programs. See applications. software Prompt if device unused for check box 217 Properties command 119 protected spreadsheets 176 protecting information 214–218 Treo device 214 proxy servers 226 PSW files 169 PUK (PIN unlock key) 258 punctuation marks 25. 33 PowerPoint files 165 PowerPoint Mobile application 174–176 PowerPoint Mobile icon 175 precautions 267 preferences 111. 271 presentations 174. 27 Purge command 109 Purge screen 109 push technology 76 INDEX 297 . 203 See also customizing preinstalled applications 194. 208 videos 135 priority levels 105. 145 plug-ins 117.setting default size 137 storing 250 synchronizing 141 taking 133–134. 257 PIN unlock key 258 PINs 61. 138. 258 Play button 143 Play Slide Show command 138 Play Sound box 55 Play sound check box 208 Play Sound list 220 playback icons 49 playback options 146. 248 viewing 133. 176 sounds 137 voice notes 162 voicemail messages 42 playlists 142. 147 Playback tab 146. 160 Priority list 91 privacy mode 105. 175 playing media files 143 multimedia messages 106–107 presentations 174. 143. 175 See also PowerPoint Mobile Preview Message command 104 Preview Mode (camera) 248 previewing multimedia messages 104 pictures 134. 216. See radio ports. 138–142 PIM applications 255. 241. 257 PIMs 230. 205 Pocket MSN 113 POP accounts 88 pop-up menus 22 port numbers 226 portable radio.

See repeating appointments redialing phone numbers 38 redirector (websites) 247 Refresh command 119 refreshing web pages 118. 219 Regional Settings icon 209 Regional Settings screen 209 reinstalling software or applications 229. 222 R radio 263. 105.Q QCELP files 102 Quality command 135 Quick Keys 36. 160 events and 158 system alarms and 220 tasks and 161 turning on and off 207 remote access servers 224 remote files 225 Remove Programs icon 194. 245 meeting requests 94 multimedia messages 102. 105. 250 battery 231. 264 RAS connections 224 reassigning buttons 211 Receive all incoming beams check box 197 receiving attachments 93 beamed information 197 email 92. 247 Region tab 209 regional settings 209. 48 Quick Tour 253 Quick Tour icon 253 QuickTime Player 142 quitting applications 28. See battery recipients. 250 298 INDEX . sending to multiple 102 Record button action option 164 recording sounds 207 videos 135 voice notes 214 Recording icon 162 recording toolbar 162 records (data) 196 recurring appointments. 110 pictures 133 text messages 101. 231 Reminder option 154 reminders adding 154. 269 radio frequency emissions 261. 196 Remove Programs list 194 Remove Programs screen 194. 232 battery door 8 Bluetooth connections 127 certificates 221 contacts 152 directory services 95 documents 174 email accounts 90 events 158 expansion cards 198 favorites 120 files 191. 237 videos 133 Receiving Data message 197 recently-viewed web pages 122 rechargeable battery. 196 Remove Split command 178 removing applications 194.

147 retrieving voicemail 41 Return key 24 reverse type 20 Revert to Saved command 141 revision marks 169 RF emissions 261. 140 RTF files 168 RTSP files 138. 109. See shortcut menus Ringer switch 7. 173. 200 renaming documents 173 expansion cards 201 items in folders 190 workbooks 185 worksheets 182 Repeat check box 208 Repeat command 144 repeat patterns 155 repeating appointments 155 repeating current song 144 repeating sounds 208 repeating tasks 160 Replace All button 171. 248 restarting Treo device. 110 notes 163 partnerships 127. silencing 40 ringtone files 102 ringtone managers 249 ringtones assigning to contacts 49. 230 resets 217. 270 Resolution command 134. 152 creating video 139 downloading 54 previewing 56 selecting 54 roaming 80. 206 ringer volume 56 ringer. 243 information 231. 242 Roaming option 55 rotating pictures 136. 238 pictures 141 speed-dial buttons 50 tasks 161 text 20 web files 123 workbooks 186 worksheets 186 Rename command 201 Rename/Move command 170. 56. 235 caution for 231 resizing text 119 resolution (camera) 248 resolution (screen) 234. 230–232. 232 sound settings 206 Resume playback option 106. 139. 184 Replace text as you type check box 213 replacing information 184 text 170 the battery 232–233 Request Delivery/Read Receipt check box 105 Require PIN when phone is used check box 216 reset button 6. 184 Replace button 171. 264 RF Safety Statement 261 right action key 20 right-click menus. 144 running multiple applications 28 INDEX 299 . 185.items from folders 190 items from libraries 145 items from playlists 146 messages 97. See resets restoring backups 232.

186 Schedule command 80 Schedule screen 80 scheduled syncs 242. 270 Screen taps check box 207 Screen view 209 screens. 170. 245 schedules adding items to 154. 164. 234 turning on or off 33. 209 screen resolution 234. 156. 174 email messages 92 files 199 multimedia items 107 multimedia messages 107 notes 163. 214 selecting items on 20 setting backgrounds for 140. 255 waking up 34. 155. 222 S Safety Statement (FCC) 261 Save As command 121. 223. 159 managing 154–158 organizing events for 157 removing events 158 removing tasks 161 sorting tasks on 160 unavailable time on 157 viewing daily 153 scheduling synchronization 79–80 screen activating items on 20 activating wrong features 235 adjusting brightness 208 adjusting display 208–210 aligning 209 arranging web pages on 118 battery life and 12 caring for 6 changing color themes for 205. 171 Save Image command 121 Save links… option 123 Save password check box 78. 210 changing orientation 210 disabling touch-sensitivity for 214 locking 215 moving around on 17–19 scrolling in 18–19. 34. 43 screen fonts 208 Screen icon 208. 177. 171.Running Programs tab 29. returning to previous 19 screensavers 136 scroll arrows 19 scroll bar 19 Scroll upon reaching the last line check box 214 300 INDEX . 205 setting delays for 34 specifications for 270 troubleshooting 209. 89 Save to Contact Ring Tone command 139 Save to Contacts command 44 Save to list 199 Save to option 164 Save to Template command 107 Saved folder 92 saving documents 168. 214 passwords 89 phone numbers 44 pictures and videos 137 text messages 107 workbooks 176.

134 Send Link via E-mail command 119 Send meeting requests via option 159 Send outgoing items… check box 80 Send Sound command 207 Send via E-Mail command 195 Send/Receive command 93 sending copyrighted items 139 email 92. 161 Set up my proxy server option 226 setting alarm clock 220 settings. 246 See also Exchange Servers service contracts 1 service providers 224. 104. 189–190 searching for signal 12 secure websites 247 security 126. 109 servers. 221 security certificates 117. 216 Select All Text command 121 selecting applications 28 items in folders 191 items in lists 23 items on screen 19. 119. See options shaded lightning bolt 10 sharing information 194 sheet list 178 Shift cells options 185 Shift key 24. 108 pictures 139 sounds 207 text messages 40. troubleshooting 243. 214–218. 244. 22 options in lists 20. 190 Search icon 189 search results list 189. 190 searching contacts list 36 documents 170 spreadsheets 184 web pages 117 searching for files 189. 156. 20 menu items 21. 25 INDEX 301 . 236. 23 speed-dial entries 30 tabs 18 web links 19. 184. 119 self-portrait mirror 6. 160 Sent folder 97. 61 Set as Hands-Free command 238 Set as Today Background command 140 Set reminders for new items option 158. 245 meeting requests 95. 22. 159 multimedia messages 103.scrolling device screen 18–19. 58. 101 videos 139 sensitivity options 157. 119 SD expansion cards 197 SDP files 144 SDP Streaming files 138 Search button 190 Search dialog box 189 Search for list 189. 214 slides 175 spreadsheets 178 web pages 118. 98. 190 searching for information 171. 245 Services tab 47. 221 security options (web) 123 security software 214 Security tab 123. 59.

182 sort options 161 sort order 182 sorting folder items 190 History list items 122 information 182 messages 109 pictures and videos 140 tasks 160 sound clips 102 Sound Mode buttons 206 sound settings 206. 107 smartcard. 235. See SIM smartcards smartphone getting help with 227 troubleshooting 227 SMS messaging 101. 206 silencing the ringer 40 silent alarm 206. 111 silencing system sounds 7. 258 Size option 172 sketching 162 Skins tab 147 Slide Show tab 136 slide show toolbar 139 slide shows 136. See SMS messaging shortcut menus 22 shortcuts 20 Show alphabetical index option 152 Show contact names only option 153 Show half hour slots option 158 Show icons option 159 Show list 138. 111 Signatures screen 96. 174. 176 slide timing option 175 slider 19 slides 104.Short Messaging Service. 271 installing 72. 208 302 INDEX . searching for 12 signal strength 63. 208 SIM smartcards 7. 207 sounds adding to pictures 104 changing alarm 220 customizing 206 playing 137 previewing 56. 224 Signature box 111 signatures 96. See music Sort By command 161 Sort by list 182. 190 Sort command 109. 138. 258 soft resets 230 software See also applications caution for hard resets and 231 compatibility with Windows Mobile 234 included with device 2. 251 signal-strength icon 33. 191 purchasing 234 reinstalling 229. 216. 231 songs. 199 Show Options command 175 Show Pictures option 118 Show start and due dates option 161 Show Tasks entry bar option 161 Show time stamps of each message option 111 Show week numbers option 158 Shuffle command 144 side button 5 signal. 9.

180 formatting 176. 264 Speakerphone command 42 special characters 27 special characters. 210. 251. 142 speakerphone 42. 173 Spelling command 173 split bar 178 spreadsheet templates 176. symbols special occasions 155 specifications 269 speech-impaired services 57 Speed Dial Options command 50 speed-dial buttons 35. See alternate characters. worksheets accessing 165 adding charts to 183. workbooks. 258 starting data connections 225 Excel Mobile 177 Internet Explorer Mobile 117 Media Player Mobile 143 PowerPoint Mobile 175 Word Mobile 170 static electricity 266 status icons 62. 186 spreadsheets See also Excel Mobile. 181–182 insertion options for 180 scrolling 178 searching 184 sending 85 sorting in 182 unsupported features for 177 SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) 117 standby mode 134 Start button 5. 206 turning off event 208 Sounds & Notifications screen 55 Sounds & Notifications Settings icon 207 Sounds & Notifications Settings screen 207 Sounds tab 207 Space key 24 speaker 6. 201 storage card symbol 190 Storage Card tab 200.recording 207 selecting event 208 sending 207 setting ringtone 54 setting system 207 silencing 7. 243 Storage tab 97 INDEX 303 . 109 stereo headphones 142 Still image compression level list 137 Still Mode command 134 Stop command 144 stopping playback 144 stopping synchronization 83 Storage Card folder 194. 222 storage cards. 28 Start menu 28. 184 calculations in 179–180 changing order of worksheets 181 creating 176 defining filters for 183 deleting elements in 185 display options for 178– 179 entering data in 177. See expansion cards storage space 222. 48–50 Spell Check command 91 spell-checking 91. 178.

238– 244. 76. 231 system alarms 220 system dates and time 219 system errors 235 system locks 215. 179 Sync button 80 sync cable 71. 239. 75 sync conflicts 78 sync schedules 242. 82. 241 synchronizing addresses 241 dates and time 219 email 11. 72. 245 synchronization backing up information and 231 battery life and 11 benefits of 65 defaults for 67 defined 258 hard resets and 231. 74. 82 stopping 83 troubleshooting 230. 246 synchronization software 69. 47 Symbol command 179 symbols 26. 92. 258 Streaming Media application 144 Strikethrough option 172 stylus 7 submenus 22 Suggest words when entering text check box 213 support 253 Swap button 46. 217 system requirements 71. 161 304 INDEX . 71. 271 system settings 219–224 system sounds 7. 69. 250 passwords 78 pictures 250 workbooks 185 streaming 121. 20. 81. 27. 71. 248 tapping 17.storage temperatures 271 storing applications 250 attachments 93. 246 information 68. 243 with multiple computers 82 with sync cable 75 with third-party applications 71. 97 device 6 document files 172 information 197. 206. 239 manually 80 media files 143 multimedia files 141 offline 241 over Bluetooth connections 81 over IR ports 82 playlists 143 through USB hubs 240 wirelessly 69. 49. 245. 81. 232 overview 67 preparing for 71 scheduling 79–80 setting options for 83 setting up 77. 209 tapping sounds 207 task categories 160. 207 system warnings 207 T tables in documents 169 tabs 18 taking pictures 133–134.

178. 226 TDD devices 57. 214 finding and replacing 170. 161 Tasks icon 159 Tasks list 160 Tasks tab (Connections) 225. 101 setting options for 104 sorting 109 troubleshooting 237 Text Size tab 208 Text Speed Dial button 48 text speed-dial buttons 36. 213. 25.Task tab 160 tasks adding notes to 160 completing 160 creating 159 customizing 161 deleting 161 displaying 160. See TTY devices temperature range 271 templates documents 170. 172 moving or copying 171 resizing 119. 210 third-party applications accessing Outlook folders and 241 caution for hard resets and 231 INDEX 305 . 263 technical support 253 telecommunications devices for impaired. 171. 48 text telephone devices. 110 forwarding 107 links in 108 opening 106 overview 99 phone calls and 43 phone numbers in 39 receiving 105. 213 formatting 172 highlighting 20. 186 text messages 107 Templates folder 170. 161 Tasks application 159–161 Tasks entry bar 159. 161 filtering 160 filtering and sorting 160 marking as sensitive 160 setting due dates for 160 setting reminders for 160. See TTY devices themes 205. 208 selecting 20 spell-checking 91. 173 word-processing features for 169 text captions 104 text fields moving to 18 opening drop-down lists in 23 removing text in 20 scrolling through 18 text files 221 text messages creating 101 deleting 109. 174 multimedia messages 107 notes 163. 237 replying to 107 saving 107 sending 40. 178 tentative appointments 154 text aligning 172 changing 170 copying 121 deleting 20 entering 24. 164 spreadsheets 176.

250 navigator and 17. 35. See partnerships TTY devices 57. 234. 215 touch-sensitive feature 214 transactions 247 transferring applications 200 files 142. 229 transition effects (slides) 175 transmission delays 237 Transparency level list 140 troubleshooting 227. 253 Trusted Device list 124. 231 troubleshooting 192. 262 event sounds 208 keyboard backlight 24 Keyguard 215 Option Lock 25 reminders 207 Ringer switch 206 screen 33. 199. 223 wireless services 11 TXT files 168 Typing mode 163 U UMTS services 259 unauthorized users 214. 38 overview 29 recovering settings for 243 retrieving voicemail from 41 Today Settings screen 205 top view (device) 7 touchscreen. 146. 135 Thumbnails button 135 TIF files 138 time format settings 209 time system settings 219 Time tab 209. 219 time units 155 time zones 219. 172 Undo command 141 306 INDEX . 127 See also partnerships trusted pairs. 220 caller IDs 59 Caps Lock 25 device 33. 125 turning on or off alarms 207. 125 trusted devices 124. 34. 231 screen resolution and 234 synchronizing with 71. See screen touchscreen lockout 214.compatibility with 191 deleting 250 getting help with 249 installing 192. 249. 37. 263 TTY/TDD options 57 Turn on Bluetooth check box 52. 29 accessing Dial Pad from 38 color themes for 210 components of 30 customizing 140. 200 information 65. 250 previewing pictures and 248 reinstalling 229. 221 unavailable time slots 157 Underline option 172 underlining text 169. 249–250 third-party vendors 71 Thumbnail View 134. 242 Timer 134 tips 1 Today icon 205 Today screen accessing 12. 125. 205 dialing from 34.

138. 141 power settings 223 Quick Tour documentation 253 running applications 222 INDEX 307 . 153 View Recording Toolbar command 162 viewing alternate characters 26 animated images 142 applications on device 28 appointments 153 calendar 153 contacts 37. 152 current connection 225 daily schedules 153 events 155. 208 vibrating alarm 206. 246 Vibrate when… check boxes 56. 71 upgrades 229 uppercase letters 25. 240 USB sync cable 74 Use above settings while roaming check box 80 Use network time zone check box 220 User Guide 253 usernames 259 V Validity Period list 105 vCal attachments 246 vCard attachments 104. 208 on-device documentation 253 PDF files 169 pictures 133. 139 Video tab 137. 138. 208 video albums 138 video file types 138 video files 102. 242 Video Mode command 135 video options 147 video ringtones 133. 141. 174 See also web links USB connections 128 USB controllers 241 USB hubs 240 USB ports 74. 141 View By command 152 View command 118. 147 videos adding sounds 137 adding to messages 104 changing resolution 135 defaults for 137 downloading 142 limiting length 137 previewing 135 receiving 133 recording 135 saving 137 sending 139 setting resolution for 248 synchronizing 141 viewing 133.Unfreeze Panes option 179 Unknown Caller option 55 unlocking device 217 SIM smartcards 216 spreadsheet rows and columns 179 unread messages 109 unretrieved voicemail 41 unsafe areas 262 untimed events 155. 157 folder contents 190 memory usage 222 multimedia messages 107 notifications 56. 156 Update Library command 145 updating information 65. 214 urgent message icon 109 URLs 144.

214 Voice recording format list 214 voice recording formats 214 voicemail customizing 49. 118. 233 voice commands 12. 119 troubleshooting 247 web pages accessing 117. 43 wallpaper 133 warnings 207. 56 ringer 56 tapping sounds 207 Volume button 5. 251 web addresses 30. 263 warranty 2 WBMP files 102 weak signals 235. 222 tasks 160. 213 Voice Command icon 233 Voice Command screen 212 Voice Command settings 212. 55 receiving notifications for 41 retrieving messages 41 sending calls to 39.space on expansion cards 200. 118 wireless settings 224 virtual private networks. 247 arranging on screen 118 clearing links to 250 copying from 121 dialing from 39. 119 searching 117 security settings for 123 308 INDEX . 225 VPN software 225 W waking up screen 34. 13. 247 troubleshooting 247 web files 123 web links clearing 123 internal memory and 250 messages and 108. 247 See also web links web browser. 118. 56 VPN clients 225. 141 web pages 117. 239 VPN connections 88. 161 videos 133. See Internet Explorer Mobile web browsing memory consumption and 250 requirements for 1 secure sites and 117. 119. 193 hiding images on 118 moving through 118 playing media files from 144 refreshing 118. 122. 122 display options for 118 downloading items from 121. 213 Voice mail option 55 voice notes 162. 93. 45 setting up 40 voicemail buttons 49 Voicemail icon 41 voicemail systems 40 volume phone 13. 247 resizing text on 119 returning to recently viewed 122 scrolling 118. See VPN connections voice captions 104 Voice Command button 212. 119 Palm online support 253 selecting 19. 138.

81.selecting addresses on 247 sending email from 119 setting as home 122 viewing 117. 259 Windows Mobile software 192 wireless band setting 60 wireless connections 115. 33 wireless modems 127 wireless phones 266 wireless services 11. 158 Week view option 158 Windows Media Player 121 Windows Mobile devices 196. 118 Web search field 117 websites See also web browsing accessing 115 compatibility with 117 connecting to 117. 33 wireless features 11. 243 WMA files 138. 191 Windows Mobile operating system 234. 128–130 wireless coverage 12. 142 WMV files 138. 184 Word Mobile application 18. workbooks adding 181 adjusting column and row size for 182 deleting 186 entering defined names in 181 entering formulas in 179. 124. 76. 185 entering functions in 179 INDEX 309 . 82. 169–174 Word Mobile icon 170 word-processing features 169 workbook list 186 workbooks See also Excel Mobile application. 127 ending connections to 226 redirectors and 247 searching over 117 submitting transactions and 247 week numbers 158 Week View 153. 249 Wireless Manager 11. 224 Wireless Manager command 11. 142 Word application 165 See also documents Word Completion tab 213 word matching 171. 224. 33. 115. 177. 186 searching 184 setting default template for 186 worksheet names 177 worksheets See also spreadsheets. 224 wireless synchronization 69. spreadsheets creating 177 deleting 186 displaying 178–179 moving around in 179 naming 185 organizing 185 replacing information in 184 saving 176. 229 Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc 2.

and columns 180 moving between 178 naming 181 removing cells. rows. 178. 170 zoom icons (presentations) 175 Zoom In command 175 zoom options 134 zoom settings 177. and columns 185 renaming 182 Writing mode 163 Y Year View 154 Z ZIP files 191 zoom buttons (camera) 134 Zoom command 119.filtering data in 183 formatting options for 181–182 inserting cells. 214 310 INDEX . rows.